You are on page 1of 223

Product Description

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching


System
V100R009

Issue 01
Date 2009-01-10

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 2 of 223


Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com







Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 3 of 223

About This Document
Author
Prepared by Date
Reviewed by Date
Approved by Date

Summary
This document includes:
Chapter Description
1 Network Application Describes the OptiX OSN 7500 and its position in the
network.
2 Function This chapter generally describes the features of the
OptiX OSN 7500 in the terms of capacity, interface,
boards, OAM and other functions.
3 Hardware Describes the mechanical structure and the
adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN
7500.
4 Software Architecture Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN
7500. It includes intelligent software, board software,
NE software and NM software.
5 Data Features Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of
the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of function, application
and protection.
6 ASON Features This chapter introduces the ASON features of the
OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of service classes and
application.
7 Protection Describes protection modes (including equipment
level and network level) and characteristics
supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 4 of 223

8 OAM This chapter describes main technical characteristics
of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of maintenance and
centralized management.
9 Security Management This chapter describes main technical characteristics
of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of safe operation.
10 Technical Specifications This chapter describes the hardware dimension,
interface specifications, transmission performance,
environment requirements and power specification
for the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.8 Power Consumption
and Weight of Each Board
This appendix lists the power consumption and
weight of the boards that are configured on the OptiX
OSN 7500.
11 Compliant Standards This appendix lists international standards to which
the OptiX OSN 7500 conforms in terms of design and
performance.
12 Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.
13 Acronyms and
Abbreviations
The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations
used in this document.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 5 of 223

History
Issue Details Date Author Approved by



PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 6 of 223

Contents
1 Network Application......................................................................................................11
2 Function........................................................................................................................ 14
2.1 Capacity.......................................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity ........................................................................................................ 14
2.1.2 Microwave Capacity............................................................................................................... 15
2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity.............................................................................................................. 16
2.2 Service............................................................................................................................................ 17
2.2.1 Service Type .......................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................ 18
2.3 Interface.......................................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.1 Service Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces .................................................................................. 21
2.4 Networking Topology ...................................................................................................................... 21
2.5 Protection........................................................................................................................................ 23
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection................................................................................................... 24
2.5.2 Network Level Protection....................................................................................................... 24
2.6 Board REG Function....................................................................................................................... 25
2.7 ASON Features............................................................................................................................... 27
2.8 Built-in WDM Technology................................................................................................................ 27
2.9 Microwave Technology ................................................................................................................... 28
2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply........................................................................................................... 28
2.11 Clock ............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.12 High Precise Timing...................................................................................................................... 29
2.13 OAM Information Interworking...................................................................................................... 30
2.14 OAM.............................................................................................................................................. 31
2.14.1 Software Package Loading.................................................................................................. 32
2.14.2 Hot Patch ............................................................................................................................. 33
2.14.3 NSF Function ....................................................................................................................... 33
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement ................................................................................................ 33
2.14.5 PRBS Function..................................................................................................................... 34
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression............................................................................................ 34
2.14.7 TCM...................................................................................................................................... 35
2.14.8 ETH-OAM............................................................................................................................. 35
2.15 Security Management................................................................................................................... 36
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 7 of 223

3 Hardware....................................................................................................................... 37
3.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 37
3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................ 39
3.3 Subrack........................................................................................................................................... 40
3.3.1 Structure................................................................................................................................. 41
3.3.2 Slot Allocation......................................................................................................................... 42
3.4 Boards............................................................................................................................................. 44
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards ................................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards.......................................................................... 50
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 51
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 56
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 57
3.4.6 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................... 61
3.4.7 Microwave Boards.................................................................................................................. 62
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards ........................................................................................... 62
3.4.9 Other Boards.......................................................................................................................... 63
4 Software Architecture .................................................................................................. 65
4.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 65
4.2 Communication Protocols............................................................................................................... 66
4.3 Board Software............................................................................................................................... 66
4.4 NE Software.................................................................................................................................... 66
4.5 Network Management System........................................................................................................ 67
4.6 ASON Software............................................................................................................................... 68
5 Data Features................................................................................................................ 70
5.1 Ethernet Features ........................................................................................................................... 70
5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................ 70
5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 81
5.1.3 Protection............................................................................................................................... 85
5.2 RPR Features ................................................................................................................................. 86
5.2.2 Functions................................................................................................................................ 88
5.2.3 Application.............................................................................................................................. 91
5.2.4 Protection............................................................................................................................... 93
5.3 ATM Features.................................................................................................................................. 94
5.3.1 Functions................................................................................................................................ 94
5.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 97
5.3.3 Protection............................................................................................................................. 100
5.4 DDN Features............................................................................................................................... 100
5.4.1 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 101
5.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 101
5.4.3 Protection............................................................................................................................. 102
5.5 SAN Features ............................................................................................................................... 103
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 8 of 223

6 ASON Features........................................................................................................... 104
6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies......................................................................................... 104
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links........................................................................................... 104
6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links.................................................................................................. 106
6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration................................................................................................ 106
6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration .............................................................................. 107
6.4 ASON Clock Tracing..................................................................................................................... 108
6.5 SLA............................................................................................................................................... 111
6.6 Diamond Services......................................................................................................................... 113
6.7 Gold Services ............................................................................................................................... 117
6.8 Silver Services .............................................................................................................................. 119
6.9 Copper Services ........................................................................................................................... 121
6.10 Iron Services............................................................................................................................... 122
6.11 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................ 123
6.12 Service Association..................................................................................................................... 126
6.13 Service Optimization................................................................................................................... 127
6.14 Service Migration........................................................................................................................ 127
6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................ 128
6.16 Preset Restoring Trail ................................................................................................................. 128
6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail ................................................................................................... 128
6.18 Shared Risk Link Group.............................................................................................................. 130
6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS ............................................................................................ 130
7 Protection ................................................................................................................... 132
7.1 Equipment Level Protection.......................................................................................................... 132
7.1.1 TPS Protection..................................................................................................................... 133
7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units ................................................... 134
7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit ........................................................................................ 134
7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards ..................................................................................... 135
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards............................................................................................ 136
7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards................................................................................... 137
7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit ...................................................................... 138
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit ................................................................... 138
7.1.9 Intelligent Fans..................................................................................................................... 139
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ........................................................... 139
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions ................................................... 139
7.2 Network Level Protection.............................................................................................................. 140
7.2.1 Linear MSP .......................................................................................................................... 141
7.2.2 MSP Ring............................................................................................................................. 141
7.2.3 SNCP ................................................................................................................................... 142
7.2.4 DNI ....................................................................................................................................... 146
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection.................................................................................... 147
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 9 of 223

7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP.................................................................................................... 147
7.2.7 RPR Protection .................................................................................................................... 149
7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection................................................................................................ 150
8 OAM............................................................................................................................. 152
8.1 Operation and Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 152
8.2 Network Management................................................................................................................... 154
9 Security Management ................................................................................................ 155
9.1 Authentication Management ......................................................................................................... 155
9.2 Authorization Management ........................................................................................................... 155
9.3 Network Security Management..................................................................................................... 156
9.4 System Security Management...................................................................................................... 156
9.5 Log Management .......................................................................................................................... 157
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management ............................................................................................. 157
9.5.2 Syslog Management ............................................................................................................ 157
10 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 159
10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment ..................................................................................... 159
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet.............................................................................................. 160
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack............................................................................................. 160
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters ................................................................................................. 161
10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering ........................................................................................................... 161
10.1.5 Laser Safety Class............................................................................................................. 162
10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance ......................................................................... 162
10.1.7 Transmission Performance ................................................................................................ 163
10.1.8 Protection Performance ..................................................................................................... 163
10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility............................................................................................ 165
10.1.10 Environmental Specification............................................................................................. 166
10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces ......................................................................... 167
10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 168
10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 168
10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 169
10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 171
10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 173
10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation........................................................................................................ 174
10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................ 175
10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces....................................................................................................... 176
10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces...................................................................... 177
10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces................................................................................................... 178
10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces................................................................................................... 178
10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces....................................................................... 179
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications............................................................................................ 179
10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications........................................................................................ 180
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 10 of 223

10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications......................................................................................... 180
10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications......................................................................................... 180
10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications.......................................................................... 181
10.5 Microwave RF Performance ....................................................................................................... 181
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes............................................................................................................. 182
10.5.2 Frequency Band................................................................................................................. 183
10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity............................................................................................................ 184
10.5.4 Transceiver Performance................................................................................................... 186
10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance.................................................................................... 189
10.5.6 IF Performance .................................................................................................................. 190
10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem................................................ 190
10.5.8 Equipment Reliability ......................................................................................................... 190
10.6 Safety Certification...................................................................................................................... 191
10.7 Environmental Conditions........................................................................................................... 192
10.7.1 Environment for Storage .................................................................................................... 192
10.7.2 Environment for Transportation.......................................................................................... 194
10.7.3 Environment for Operation................................................................................................. 197
10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ........................................................................ 199
11 Compliant Standards ............................................................................................... 203
11.1 ITU-T Recommendations............................................................................................................ 203
11.2 IEEE Standards........................................................................................................................... 205
11.3 IETF Standards ........................................................................................................................... 206
11.4 ANSI Standards........................................................................................................................... 207
11.5 Environment Related Standards ................................................................................................. 207
11.6 EMC Standards........................................................................................................................... 208
11.7 Safety Compliance Standards..................................................................................................... 208
11.8 Protection Standards................................................................................................................... 209
11.9 ASON Standards......................................................................................................................... 209
11.10 Microwave Standards................................................................................................................ 210
12 Glossary.................................................................................................................... 213
13 Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................. 219

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 11 of 223

1 Network Application
This chapter describes the position and application of the OptiX OSN 7500 intelligent
optical switching system (the OptiX OSN 7500) in an optical transmission network.
The OptiX OSN 7500 is the optical core switching (OCS) equipment. It is a next
generation equipment that Huawei has developed based on the type of metropolitan
area network (MAN) and its development trend in the future.
As an intelligent optical core switching system with large capacity, the OptiX OSN
7500 is mainly used at the backbone layer of the MAN to groom and transmit various
services with different granularities.
The OptiX OSN 7500 has 360 Gbit/s higher order and 80 Gbit/s lower order
cross-connect capacities, and features large switching capacity.
The OptiX OSN 7500 integrates the following technologies:
l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
l Ethernet
l Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
l Storage area network (SAN)
l Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)
l Digital data network (DDN)
l Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
l Microwave Technology
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 12 of 223

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500


As a system used at a higher layer, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be networked with the
following equipment to provide a complete MAN solution:
l OptiX OSN 9500
l OptiX OSN 3500
l OptiX OSN 3500T
l OptiX OSN 3500 II
l OptiX OSN 2500
l OptiX OSN 2500 REG
l OptiX OSN 1500
Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 7500 in a transmission network.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 13 of 223

Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 7500
Ethernet SAN PSTN ATM . . .
Microwave
Technology
OptiX OSN 9500
Backbone
layer
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500
Convergence
layer
Access
layer
GSM/CDMA/
WCDMA/TD-
SCDMA
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 3500 II
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
Ethernet
Storage Area Network (SAN)
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WDMA)
Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA)
Microwave Technology


As an intelligent multiservice switching and transmission system, the OptiX OSN 7500
can be used as follows:
l A core convergence node for a large city
l An optical core switching (OCS) system for a medium or small city
l A service grooming node on a provincial trunk

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 14 of 223

2 Function
2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity
Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
2.1.2 Microwave Capacity
The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX
OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by
different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different.
2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity
The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity
Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following cross-connect boards: T1GXCSA,
T1EXCSA, T2UXCSA, T1SXCSA and T1IXCSA. Table 2-1 lists their cross-connect
capacities.
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity
Board Higher-Order
Cross-Connect
Capacity
Lower-Order Cross-Connect
Capacity
Access
Capacity of
Single
Subrack
T1GXCSA 240 Gbit/s (1536 x
1536 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4),
equivalent to (8064 x 8064
VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3)
200 Gbit/s
(1280 x
1280 VC-4)
T1EXCSA
a
240 Gbit/s (1536 x
1536 VC-4)
40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4),
equivalent to (16128 x 16128
VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3)
200 Gbit/s
(1280 x
1280 VC-4)
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 15 of 223

Board Higher-Order
Cross-Connect
Capacity
Lower-Order Cross-Connect
Capacity
Access
Capacity of
Single
Subrack
T2UXCSA 360 Gbit/s (2304 x
2304 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)
equivalent to (8064 x 8064
VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s
(1792 x
1792 VC-4)
T1SXCSA 360 Gbit/s (2304 x
2304 VC-4)
40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4)
equivalent to (16128 x 16128
VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s
(1792 x
1792 VC-4)
T1IXCSA 360 Gbit/s (2304 x
2304 VC-4)
80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4)
equivalent to (3225632256
VC-12) or (15361536 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s
(1792 x
1792 VC-4)
a: The T1EXCSA board cannot be used with any line board of the N2 series (except
the N2SLQ16). As the T2SL64 board is no longer manufactured, it can be replaced
by the T2SL64A board, without affecting the services. It is recommended to use the
T1EXCSA board with the T2SL64A board.

2.1.2 Microwave Capacity
The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX
OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by
different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different.
Table 2-2 lists the maximum number of IF boards and the maximum number of
microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 2-2 Microwave capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment
Equipment Type
Maximum Number of
Configured IF Boards
Maximum Supported
Microwave Capacity
(Channel)
OptiX OSN 1500A 2 4
OptiX OSN 1500B 1 2
OptiX OSN 2500 5 10
OptiX OSN 3500 10 20
OptiX OSN
3500T(19inch)
10 20
OptiX OSN 3500II 10 20
OptiX OSN 7500 15 30

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 16 of 223

2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity
The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 22 service slots. The maximum access capacity varies
according to the cross-connect and timing boards installed.
Figure 2-1 shows the access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA
is used.
Figure 2-1 Access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA is used
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
8
G
X
C
S
A
(
A
)

/
E
X
C
S
A
(
A
)
G
X
C
S
A
(
B
)

/
E
X
C
S
A
(
B
)
FANA FANA FANA
S
L
O
T
1
7
Fiber routing Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
4
G
S
C
C
(
A
)
G
S
C
C
(
B
)
S
L
O
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
3
A
U
X
P
I
U
(
A
)
P
I
U
(
B
)
SLOT
32
SLOT
33
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
3
8
E
O
W
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
A !: Active B !: Standby
5

G
b
i
t
/
s
5

G
b
i
t
/
s
5

G
b
i
t
/
s
5

G
b
i
t
/
s

Figure 2-2 shows the access capacity of service slots when the
T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is used.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 17 of 223

Figure 2-2 Access capacity of service slots when the T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is
used
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
8
U
X
C
S
A
(
A
)

/
S
X
C
S
A
(
A
)
/
I
X
C
S
A
(
A
)
U
X
C
S
A
(
B
)

/
S
X
C
S
A
(
B
)
/
I
X
C
S
A
(
B
)
FANA FANA FANA
S
L
O
T
1
7
Fiber routing Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
4
G
S
C
C
(
A
)
G
S
C
C
(
B
)
S
L
O
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
3
A
U
X
P
I
U
(
A
)
P
I
U
(
B
)
SLOT
32
SLOT
33
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
3
8
E
O
W
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
A!: Active B !: Standby
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0

G
b
i
t
/
s


2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.
2.2.1 Service Type
The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet,
RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services.
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the
type and quantity of the configured boards.
2.2.1 Service Type
The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet,
RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services.
For details about supported service types, refer to Table 2-3.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 18 of 223

Table 2-3 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Service Type Description
SDH services
l
Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64
l
Standard SDH concatenated services:
VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c
l
Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv
(X8), VC3-Xv (X24)
l
SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s
PDH services
l
E1/T1 service
l
E3/T3 service
l
E4 service
NOTE
With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing
and demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.
Ethernet services
l
Ethernet private line (EPL) service
l
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
l
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
l
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
RPR services
l
EVPL service
l
EVPLAN service
ATM services
l
Constant bit rate (CBR) service
l
Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
l
Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
l
Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
DDN services
l
N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service
l
Framed E1 service
SAN services
l
Fiber channel (FC) service
l
Fiber connection (FICON) service
l
Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service
l
Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
(DVB-ASI) service

2.2.2 Service Access Capacity
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the
type and quantity of the configured boards.
Table 2-4 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500 for accessing different
services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 19 of 223

Table 2-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500
Service Type Maximum Number of Services
Supported by a Single Subrack
STM-64 standard or concatenated
service
28
STM-64 (FEC) service 17
STM-16 standard or concatenated
service
112
STM-16 (FEC) service 22
STM-4 standard or concatenated
service
88
STM-1 standard service 280
STM-1 (electrical) service 66
E4 service 16
E3/T3 service 102
E1/T1 service 252
N x 64 kbit/s service (N: 131) 32
Framed E1 service 32
FE service 208
GE service 88
10GE service 44
STM-1 ATM service 88
STM-4 ATM service 22
ESCON service 88
FICON/FC100 service 44
FC200 service 22
DVB-ASI service 88

2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces
Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 20 of 223

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces
The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces
Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
Table 2-5 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-5 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Interface Description
SDH service
interface
STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2,
L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b,
Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b
STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e
STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T
G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0
THz, and can output fixed wavelength and can be directly
interconnected with the WDM equipment.
PDH service
interface
75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
Ethernet service
interface
10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,
1000Base-ZX, 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR
DDN service
interface
Framed E1
RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21
ATM service
interface
STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the
N1PD3 or N1PL3 or N1PL3A board
IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1
or N1PQM or N1PQMA or N2PQ1 board
Storage area
network (SAN)
service interface
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical
interfaces

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 21 of 223


Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2
are technical specifications defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces
The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-6 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-6 Administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 7500
Interface
Type
Description
Administration
interface
One remote maintenance interface (OAM)
Four broadcast data interfaces (S1S4)
One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1)
One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management
(ETH)
One administration serial interface (F&f)
One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire
interface
One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)
Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2)
Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two
broadcast data interfaces)
Clock
interface
Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
External synchronization and synchronous output
Alarm
interface
16-input and 4-output alarm interface
Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces
Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces
Four cabinet alarm concatenation input interface
Microwave IF
interface
One coaxial cable connects to one ODU. Each board provides two
cables to separately connect two ODUs.
Two -48 VDC power input interfaces.

2.4 Networking Topology
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings,
intersecting rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at
the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 level.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 22 of 223

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following
types of NEs:
l Terminal multiplexer (TM)
l Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)
l Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro
equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.

When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and
transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide
a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the
backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer.
l Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be
interconnected with the WDM equipment.
l Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 7500
can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-7 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-7 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 7500
Networking Mode Topology
1 Chain

2 Ring

3 Tangent
rings

4 Intersecting
rings

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 23 of 223

Networking Mode Topology
5 Ring with
chain

6 DNI

7 Hub

8 Mesh

Legends:
MADM ADM TM ASON NE


2.5 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 24 of 223

2.5.2 Network Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes.
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
Table 2-8 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 2-8 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Item Protection Scheme
PDH TPS
DDN TPS
Ethernet processing unit TPS/PPS/BPS/DLAG/1+1 hot backup
ATM 1+1 hot backup
Protection for the Microwave unit 1+1 HSB/FD/SD and N+1 hot backup
Arbitrary bit rate wavelength
conversion unit
Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective
receiving) and inter-board protection (N+1
protection)
Cross-connect and timing unit 1+1 hot backup
SCC unit 1+1 hot backup
power interface unit 1+1 hot backup
Intelligent Fans unit The power supply modules are of mutual
backup for the three fan modules.
Board Under Abnormal
Conditions
Power-Down Protection During Software
Loading, Overvoltage or Undervoltage
Protection for Power Supply and Board
Temperature Detection
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the coexistence of two different types of TPS protection groups.

2.5.2 Network Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 25 of 223

Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Network Level Protection Protection Scheme
Linear MSP
MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP),
subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and
subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
SDH protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

2.6 Board REG Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM. See Figure
2-3.
Figure 2-3 Hybrid application of ADM and REG
REG
SL64
SL64
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
SL64
IN
OUT
SL64
OptiX OSN 7500
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
SL16 SL16
IN
OUT
SL16
IN
OUT
SL16
ADM


For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-10.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 26 of 223

Table 2-10 Boards that supports the REG
Board Valid Slots When the
Cross-Connect
Capacity Is 240 Gbit/s
Valid Slots When the
Cross-Connect
Capacity is 360 Gbit/s
Function
T2SL64,
T2SL64A
Slots 3-8, 11-16, and
26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and
26-31
N1SL64 Slots 4-8, 11-16, and
26-31
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and
26-31
N2SL16,
N3SL16
Slots 3-8, 11-16, and
26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and
26-31
N2SL16A Slots 3-8, 11-16, and
26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and
26-31
N3SLN slot 3-8, 11-16, and
26-31
slot 1-8, 11-18, and
26-31
With the REG
function enabled,
the board is in the
RS loopback mode
and only processes
the regeneration
section overhead
and the frame
header.
N1SF64,
N1SF64A
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and
26-31
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and
26-31
With the REG
function enabled,
the board is in the
RS loopback mode
and only processes
the regeneration
section overhead,
the frame header
and FEC overhead.
NOTE
If the line boards are the N3SLN series, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function only
when N is 16.

For the optical interfaces for the REG, see Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Optical interfaces for the REG
Board Optical Interface Type
T2SL64,
T2SL64A
I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b
N1SL64 I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b
N1SF64 Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e
N1SF64A Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e
N2SL16, N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je
N2SL16A I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2
N3SLN L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 27 of 223

2.7 ASON Features
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize
the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 7500 are as follows:
l Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.
l Supports service level agreement (SLA).
l Supports mesh networking and protection.
l Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide
and improve the bandwidth availability.
l Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and
pre-configuration.
l Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the
scalability of the network.
l Provides ASON clock tracing.

The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 7500
according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX
OSN 7500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.8 Built-in WDM Technology
The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission
of several wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the
equipment are as follows:
l Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
can be added or dropped.
l The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is
supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.
l The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692
compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the
signals are transparently transmitted.
l Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are
cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is
realized.
l The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for
client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the
case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate
can be monitored.
l Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One
board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the
protection switching time less than 50 ms.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 28 of 223

l Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1
inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less
than 50 ms.
l Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or
demultiplexed.
l Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals
over a long distance.
l Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
2.9 Microwave Technology
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate
frequency. It can work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve
wireless service transmission.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 7500, the service signals are transmitted on the basis of
the microwave transmission flow shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Processing flow of the service signals
Cross -
connect
board
Microwave
IF board
ODU
RF signal IF signal
Baseband
signal
Antenna
Baseband
signal
Service
interface
board
PDH/SDH/Ethernet


The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following microwave functions:
l Software programmed radio (SPR) function. The microwave capacity and
modulation mode can be set through software.
l Microwave frames based on TU and STM-1. The air interface is used for the
product to interconnect with the other OptiX OSN products that adopt the
microwave frames based on TU and STM-1 or to interconnect with the OptiX
RTN 600.
l 1+1 protection and N+1 protection.
l Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.
2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply
The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC
power supply is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
The OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an
uninterrupted power modules (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC
into 48 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500.
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply.
The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 29 of 223

The dimensions of the power box are 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 130 mm (H).
2.11 Clock
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the clock functions.
l SSM clock protocol
l Tributary retiming
l Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input
l External clock output shutdown
l Line clock source
l Tributary clock source
l Three working modes are as follows:
Tracing mode
Holdover mode
Free-run mode
l ASON clock tracing
For the detailed information of the relevant clock, see the clock topic in the Feature
Description.
2.12 High Precise Timing
To meet the requirement of precise time synchronization between equipment, the
OptiX OSN equipment adopts the precise time synchronization technology. The time
information is accessed in the SDH network and transmitted to the equipment (such
as the 3G wireless base station) that requires precise time.
The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts the precise time synchronization technology that meets
the requirements in IEEE 1588 standard. The system control and communication
board (N3GSCC) and the cross-connect board (T1IXCSA) are used to replace the
GPS. The time information is accessed through the S1 and S2 interfaces on the
T1EOW board and is carried by the line board to synchronize the time in the global
network.


The high precise timing function can be enabled only when the working and protection
cross-connect and SCC boards are upgraded and support the high precise timing
function of an NE.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following line boards that support the time
synchronization function.
l 10 Gbit/s rate: N1SL64 and N1SLD64.
l 2.5 Gbit/s rate: N3SL16A, N1SLD16 and N1SLQ16.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 30 of 223

l 155 Mbit/s rate: N1SL1A and N1SLQ1A.
The OptiX OSN 7500 contains the data processing board (namely, the N5EFS0 board)
that supports the time synchronization function.

The N5EFS0 boards supports the time synchronization function only when it works with the
N1EFF8A and N1ETF8A access boards.
2.13 OAM Information Interworking
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports OAM information interworking.
Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 7500 to transparently
transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party
equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 7500.
l HWECC
l IP over DCC
l OSI over DCC
Table 2-12 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 2-12 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 7500
DCC Allocation N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC
Channel type Supports the D1D1, D1D3 and D4D12 channel
types.
Mode 1 Supports 160 D1D3 channels.
Mode 2 Supports 40 D1D3 channels.
Supports 40 D4D12 channels.
Mode 3 Supports 26 D1D3 channels.
Supports 26 D4D12 channels.
Mode 4 Supports 12 D1D3 channels.
Supports 12 D4D12 channels.
Mode 5 Supports 8 D1D3 channels.
Mode 6 Supports 10 D1D3 channels.
Mode 7 Supports 70 D1D3 channels.
Supports 30 D4D12 channels.
Mode 8 Supports 100 D1D3 channels.
Supports 20 D4D12 channels.
Operation
mode
Mode 9 Supports 30 D1D1 channels.
Supports 150 D1D3 channels.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 31 of 223

DCC Allocation N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC
Mode 10 Supports 30 D1D1 channels.
Supports 39 D1D3 channels.
Supports 37 D4D12 channels.
Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols.
Default mode Mode 1

2.14 OAM
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides maintenance and management functions.The OAM of
the network can be realized by using the T2000. This topic describes the key
equipment-level OAM solutions.
2.14.1 Software Package Loading
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and
simulation software package loading.
2.14.2 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology.
2.14.3 NSF Function
The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet
boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the
board software and network processor (NP) software.
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new
version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new
version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old
version board.
2.14.5 PRBS Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
function.
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are
raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
2.14.7 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a
VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the
bit errors of each section.
2.14.8 ETH-OAM
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 32 of 223

The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2
maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission
deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
2.14.1 Software Package Loading
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and
simulation software package loading.
Software Package Loading
The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level
and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and
management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the
usability of the upgrade operations.
The software package loading has the following features:
l Users load the software in a uniform operation interface.
l The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the
N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board. If the board software files are lost,
these files can be restored from the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board.
l The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the
software version of the in-service board does not match the software package,
the board software is automatically updated.
l The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load
the files required in the current update.
l The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software
package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with
the same series of SCC boards.
l The NG-SDH equipment supports the anti-mistake package loading function.
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:
l Upgrade of the NE software
l Replacement of the service boards
l Replacement of the auxiliary boards
l Replacement of the cross-connect boards
l Replacement of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards
l Replacement of the CF cards of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards
Simulation Package Loading
If a software package needs to be loaded to an NE and if the mapping relation
between the NE boards and the software is specified according to the simulation
package, you can enable the simulation package loading function to increase the
loading efficiency.
The simulation software package includes:
l All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE
l Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each
software
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 33 of 223

The simulation software package loading has the following features:
l Simplifying the upgrade operation
l Improving the upgrade security
l Improving the upgrade efficiency
2.14.2 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located
or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of
replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or
realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are
referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
l The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
l The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and
prevents frequent software version upgrade.
l The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely.
The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the
upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks.
l The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus
improves the efficiency of solving problems.
2.14.3 NSF Function
The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet
boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the
board software and network processor (NP) software.
In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0
and N2EFS4boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In
this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the
carrier-class requirements.


If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the
service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms,
and this ensures only a low service interruption time.
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new
version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new
version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old
version board.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 34 of 223

This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the
equipment cost and the maintenance cost.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to Part
Replacement Design.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
l The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the
replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For
example, If the T2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3
services, it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board.
l The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP
configured.
2.14.5 PRBS Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
function.
The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that
provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service
path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network.
During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a
real test device.
The PRBS function has the following two types:
l If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a tributary board.
l If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:
l For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback
command on the T2000.
l On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this
path.
l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts
the statistics.
l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result.
l The user queries the PRBS statistics result.
l The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
For details, refer to PRBS.
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are
raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board,
many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line
board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 35 of 223

disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the
inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem.
If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE,
and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on
the tributary/data board are suppressed.
If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at
the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the
tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the
T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.
2.14.7 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a
VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the
bit errors of each section.
The N2SL1, N2SLQ1, N2SLO1, N3SLO1, N2SL4, N3SLN, N3SLD41, N3SLQ41,
N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N3SLT1, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SLQ16, N2SL16A and T2SL64A
boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2.14.8 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2
maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission
deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM
function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM
function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate
faults.
The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
l The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point.
l The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check.
l The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.
l OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
l Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite
end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol.
l Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance
of the link.
l Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end.
l Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance.
l Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port.
l Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 36 of 223

2.15 Security Management
The T2000 uses many schemes to ensure the security of the OptiX OSN 7500 NE.
l Authentication management
l Authorization Management
l Network Security Management
l System Security Management
l Log Management
For the details of security management, refer to the Security Management.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 37 of 223

3 Hardware
3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 7500 consists of the cabinet, subrack, and boards.
Figure 3-1 shows the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack installed in an ETSI cabinet.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 38 of 223

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 equipment
7
7
W
H
D
1
5
4
3
6
2
7

1. DC
PDU
2. Side panel 3. Cable distribution
plate
4. Orderwire phone
fixing frame
5.
Subrack
6. fiber management
tray
7. Front door

The OptiX OSN 7500 uses various types of boards and thus forms the system frame
where the cross-connect matrix is the core. The system frame of the OptiX OSN 7500
has the following units:
l SDH interface unit
l PDH interface unit
l DDN interface unit
l Data (Ethernet/ATM/SAN/Video) processing unit
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 39 of 223

l WDM processing unit
l SDH cross-connect matrix unit
l Synchronous timing unit
l SCC unit
l Overhead processing unit
l Power interface unit
l Auxiliary interface unit
l Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit
Figure 3-2 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Figure 3-2 System architecture
STM-N optical
signal
PDH signal
Ethernet signal
DDN signal
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
m
a
t
r
i
x
S
D
H

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
u
n
i
t
O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
S
y
n
c
h
r
o
n
o
u
s
t
i
m
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
A
u
x
i
l
i
a
r
y
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
S
C
C

u
n
i
t
S
D
H
/
P
D
H
/
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
/
A
T
M
/
D
D
N

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
b
o
a
r
d
SDH signal
ATM signal


3.2 Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 7500. A
power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access 48 V or 60 V
power.
Figure 3-3 shows the outer view of an ETSI cabinet.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 40 of 223

Figure 3-3 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet
T63E cabinet N63E cabinet


3.3 Subrack
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.3.1 Structure
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 41 of 223

The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the
lower layer has 18 slots.
3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area.
Figure 3-8 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Figure 3-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Upper layer processing
board area
Interface board area
Fan area
Lower layer processing
board area
Fiber routing area
Fiber routing area
W
H
D


The functions of the areas are as follows:
l Upper layer processing board area and lower layer processing board area: These
areas house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500.
l Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN
7500.
l Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated
by the equipment.
l Fiber routing area: This area houses the fiber jumpers in the subrack.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 42 of 223


The interface board is also called the access board or transit board. The interface board
provides physical interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical
signals or electrical signals to the corresponding processing board.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the
lower layer has 18 slots.
Figure 3-9 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Figure 3-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
(A): Active (B): S tandby
L
T
4
L
O
T
1
5
L
O
T
1
6
L
O
T
1
7
L
O
T
1
8
S
C
S
C
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
8
X
C
S
(
A
)
X
C
S
(
B
)
FAN
S
L
O
T
1
7
Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
4
G
S
C
C
(
A
)
G
S
C
C
(
B
)
S
L
O
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
3
A
U
X
P
I
U
(
A
)
P
I
U
(
B
)
SLOT
32
33
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
3
8
E
O
W
SLOT 39 SLOT 40 FAN FAN SLOT 41
SLOT
Fiber routing


Slot Area for Interface Boards
l Slots for the service interface boards: slots 1922 and 3538.
l Slot for the orderwire interface board: slot 23.
l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 34.
Slot Area for Processing Boards
l Slots for the service processing boards: slots 18, 1118 and 2631.
l Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 910.
l Slots for the PIU boards: slots 3233.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 43 of 223

l Slots for the system control and communication (SCC) boards: slots 2425.
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for
the processing boards.
Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards
Slots for Processing Boards Slots for Interface Boards
Slot 2 Slots 1920
Slot 3 Slots 2122
Slot 17 Slots 3536
Slot 18 Slots 3738

Paired Slots
If the overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots
are paired slots. When an NE is configured with an orderwire phone or realizes the
service protection in DPS mode, the two boards that form a ring must be inserted in
the paired slots. Table 3-3 lists the paired slots.
Table 3-2 Paired slots
Slot Paired Slot
Slot 1 Slot 18
Slot 2 Slot 17
Slot 3 Slot 16
Slot 4 Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 14
Slot 6 Slot 13
Slot 7 Slot 12
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 26 Slot 27
Slot 28 Slot 29
Slot 30 Slot 31

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 44 of 223

3.4 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards
The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards,
and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards.
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards.
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards.
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards.
3.4.6 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards.
3.4.7 Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards.
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.
3.4.9 Other Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards
The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards,
and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards.
SDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16,
STM-4, and STM-1 rates.
Table 3-4 lists the SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-3 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1SL64 1xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SLQ4,
N2SLQ4, and
N1SLQ4A
4xSTM-4 optical
interface board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 45 of 223

Board Description Board Description
T2SL64 1xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SLD4,
N2SLD4, and
N1SLD4A
2xSTM-4 optical
interface board
T2SL64A 1xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SLT1 and
N3SLT1
12xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SF64 and
N1SF64A
1xSTM-64 optical
interface board (with
the forward error
correction (FEC)
function)
N1SLQ1,
N2SLQ1, and
N1SLQ1A
4xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SLD64 2xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SL1, N2SL1,
and N1SL1A
1xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SL16,
N2SL16, and
N3SL16
1xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N1SLH1 and
N1SLH1A
16xSTM-1 signal
processing board
N1SL16A,
N2SL16A, and
N3SL16A
1xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N1SEP1 2xSTM-1 line
processing board
when the interfaces
are available on the
front panel
8xSTM-1 line
processing board
when the interfaces
are available on the
corresponding
interface board
N1SLQ16 and
N2SLQ16
4xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N2SLO1 and
N3SLO1
8xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SF16 1xSTM-16 optical
interface board (with
the out-band FEC
function)
N3SLN 1xSTM-16/STM-4/S
TM-1 optical
interface board
N1SLO16 8xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N3SLD41 2xSTM-4/STM-1
optical interface
board
N1SL4, N2SL4,
and N1SL4A
1xSTM-4 optical
interface board
N3SLQ41 4xSTM-4/STM-1
optical interface
board

PDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and
have different impedances.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 46 of 223

Table 3-5 lists the PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-4 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1PQ1 and
N2PQ1
63xE1 service processing
board
N1PD3
and
N2PD3
6xE3/T3 service
processing board
N1PQM and
N1PQMA
63xE1/T1 service
processing board
N2PQ3 12xE3/T3 service
processing board
N1PL3 and
N2PL3
3xE3/T3 service
processing board
N1DX1 DDN service accessing
and converging board
N1PL3A
and
N2PL3A
3xE3/T3 service
processing board (The
interfaces are available on
the front panel.)
N1DXA DDN service converging
and processing board
N2SPQ4 4xE4/STM-1 electrical
processing board
- -

Data Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the data boards that provide the transparent
transmission function, switching function, or RPR function.
Table 3-6 lists the data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-5 Data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1EFT8 8xFE or 16xFE transparent
transmission board
N1EMS4 4xGE and 16xFE
transparent transmission
and converging board
N1EFT8A 8xFE transparent
transmission board
N1EMS2 2xGE and 16xFE
transparent transmission
and converging board
N1EGT2
and
N2EGT2
2xGE transparent
transmission board
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
and
N4EGS4
4xGE switching and
processing board
N2EFS0,
N4EFS0,
and
N5EFS0
8xFE switching and
processing board
N2EGR2 2xGE ring processing
board
N1EFS0A 16xFE switching and
processing board
N2EMR0 12xFE and 1xGE ring
processing board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 47 of 223

Board Description Board Description
N1EFS4,
N2EFS4,
and
N3EFS4
4xFE switching and
processing board
N1ADL4 1xSTM-4 ATM service
processing board
N2EGS2
and
N3EGS2
2xGE switching and
processing board
N1ADQ1 4xSTM-1 ATM service
processing board
N1MST4 4-port multi-service
transparent transmission
board
N1IDL4 1xSTM-4 ATM service
processing board
N1EAS2 2-port 10xGE Layer 2
switching and processing
board
N1IDQ1 4xSTM-1 ATM service
processing board

Interface Boards and Switching and Bridging Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports optical interface boards, electrical interface boards,
and switching and bridging boards.
Table 3-7 lists the interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX
OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-6 Interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 7500
supports
Board Description Board Description
N1EU08 8xSTM-1 electrical interface
board
N1D12S 32xE1/T1 switching
access board (120 ohms)
N1OU08 8xSTM-1 optical interface
board (LC)
N1D12B 32xE1/T1 access board
(120 ohms)
N2OU08 8xSTM-1 optical interface
board (SC)
N1EFF8
and
N1EFF8A
8x100M Ethernet optical
interface board
N1D75S 32xE1 switching access
board (75 ohms)
N1ETF8
and
N1ETF8A
8x100M Ethernet twisted
pair interface board
N1MU04 4xE4/STM-1 electrical
interface board
N1ETS8 8x10/100M Ethernet
twisted pair interface
switching board
N1D34S 6xE3/T3 switching access
board
N1DM12 DDN service interface
board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 48 of 223

Board Description Board Description
N1C34S 3xE3/T3 switching access
board
N1TSB8 8-channel electrical
interface protection
switching board

Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple system control boards and cross-connect
boards that have different cross-connect capacities.
Table 3-8 lists the cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX
OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-7 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 7500
supports
Board Description Board Description
T1GXCSA General
cross-connect and
synchronous timing
board
T2SXCSA Super cross-connect and
synchronous timing
board
T1EXCSA
a
Enhanced
cross-connect and
synchronous timing
board
T1IXCSA Infinite cross-connect
and synchronous timing
board
T2UXCSA Ultra cross-connect
and synchronous
timing board
N2GSCC,
N3GSCC,
N4GSCC, and
N5GSCC
Intelligent system control
and communication
board
T1SXCSA Super
cross-connect and
synchronous timing
board
- -
a: The T1EXCSA cannot work with the line boards of series N2 (except for the
N2SLQ16). The T2SL64 is not delivered any longer and can be replaced with the
T2SL64A. It is recommended that you use the T2SL64A with the T1EXCSA.

Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface
board and fan board.
Table 3-9 lists the auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 49 of 223

Table 3-8 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description
T1EOW Orderwire processing board
T1AUX System auxiliary interface board
N1FANA Fan board (high power)

WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM boards such as the optical add/drop multiplexing
board and optical amplifier board.
Table 3-10 lists the WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-9 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
TN11CMR2 2-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing
board
N1MR2C 2-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing
board
TN11CMR4 4-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing
board
N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate
wavelength conversion
board
TN11MR2 2-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing
board
TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier
board
TN11MR4 4-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing
board
N1FIB Filter isolating board
N1MR2A 2-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing
board
- -

Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports microwave boards such as the microwave IF board
and microwave power board.
Table 3-11 lists the microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-10 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description
N1IFSD1 Dual-port IF board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 50 of 223

Board Description
N1RPWR 6-channel ODU power board

Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple optical amplifier boards and dispersion
compensation boards.
Table 3-12 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that
the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-11 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX
OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1BPA and
N2BPA
Optical booster and
pre-amplifier board
N1COA, 61COA, and
62COA
Case-shaped
optical amplifier
N1BA2 Optical booster
amplifier board
N1DCU and N2DCU Dispersion
compensation
board
N1RPC01 Forward Raman
driving board
(external)
N1RPC02 Backward Raman
driving board
(external)

Power Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports power boards such as the UPM and power interface
board.
Table 3-13 lists the power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-12 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description
UPM Uninterruptible power module
T1PIU Power interface board

3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
Table 3-14 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in
the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 51 of 223

Table 3-13 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in the OptiX
OSN 7500
Board Full Name Valid Slots
T1GXCSA General cross-connect and
synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T1EXCSA Enhanced cross-connect and
synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T2UXCSA Ultra cross-connect and
synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T1SXCSA Super cross-connect and
synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T1IXCSA Infinite cross-connect and
synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
N2GSCC,
N3GSCC,
N4GSCC,
N5GSCC
System control and
communication board
Slots 24 and 25

3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Table 3-15 lists the SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-14 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type Connector
T2SL64,
T2SL64A
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38,
1116 and 2631
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2,
S-64.2b,
L-64.2b,
Le-64.2,
Ls-64.2,
V-64.2b
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 52 of 223

Board Valid Slots Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type Connector
N1SLD64 If the cross-connect capacity is 240
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 78,
1112 and 3031
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-64.1, S-64.2b LC
N1SL64 Slots 48, 1116 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2,
S-64.2b,
L-64.2b,
Le-64.2,
Ls-64.2,
V-64.2b
LC
N1SF64 Slots 48, 1116 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ue-64.2c,
Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e
LC
N1SF64A Slots 48, 1116 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ue-64.2c,
Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e
LC
N1SF16 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38,
1116 and 2631
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ue-16.2c,
Ue-16.2d
LC
N1SL16,
N2SL16,
N3SL16
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38,
1116 and 2631
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
L-16.2,
L-16.2Je,
V-16.2Je,
U-16.2Je
LC
N1SLD16 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SLO16 If the cross-connect capacity is 240
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 78,
1112 and 3031
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SL16A
,
N2SL16A
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38,
1116 and 2631
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 53 of 223

Board Valid Slots Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type Connector
N1SLQ16
,
N2SLQ16
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (for the board housed in any
of slots 12 and 1718, two optical
interfaces can be configured), and
slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (for the
board housed in any of slots 38,
1116 and 2631, four optical
interfaces can be configured)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (for the board
housed in any of slots 18, 1118
and 2631, four optical interfaces
can be configured)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4
A,
N2SLQ4
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (for the board housed in any
of slots 12 and 1718, two optical
interfaces can be configured), or
slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (for the
board housed in any of slots 38,
1116 and 2631, four optical
interfaces can be configured)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (for the board
housed in any of slots 18, 1118
and 2631, four optical interfaces
can be configured)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N3SLD41
,
N3SLQ41
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1/I-4,
S-1.1/S-4.1,
L-1.1/L-4.1,
L-1.2/L-4.2,
Le-1.2/Le-4.2
LC
N1SLD4,
N1SLD4A
, N2SLD4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SL4,
N1SL4A,
N2SL4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 54 of 223

Board Valid Slots Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type Connector
N3SLN Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1/I-4,
S-1.1/S-4.1,
L-1.1/L-4.1,
L-1.2/L-4.2,
Le-1.2/Le-4.2,
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2,
Le-16.2
LC
N1SLQ1,
N1SLQ1
A
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N2SLQ1 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1OU08
S-1.1 optical
interface
LC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N2OU08
S-1.1 optical
interface
SC
N1SLH1,
N1SLH1A
a

Slots 23 and 1718
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
N2SLO1 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N3SLO1 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 55 of 223

Board Valid Slots Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type Connector
N1SLT1 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (for the board housed in any
of slots 12 and 1718, eight optical
interfaces can be configured), and
slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (for the
board housed in any of slots 38,
1116 and 2631, 12 optical
interfaces can be configured)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (for the board
housed in any of slots 18, 1118
and 2631, 12 optical interfaces can
be configured)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
S-1.1 LC
N3SLT1 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18 ,
1118 and 2631
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18 ,
1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
S-1.1 LC
N1SL1,
N1SL1A,
N2SL1
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N2OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC
N1SEP1
a
Slots 23 and 1718
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
N1SEP1
b
Slots 13 and 1718 Interfaces
available on the
front panel
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 56 of 223

Board Valid Slots Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type Connector
a: The N1SLH1, N1SLH1A and N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 board to realize the TPS
protection.
b: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board,
they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are
displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.

3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-15 PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N2SPQ4 Slots 23 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 4-port
electrical interface board N1MU04
75-ohm E4/STM-1
electrical interface
SMB
N1PD3
a
,
N2PD3
Slot 23 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 6-port
electrical interface switching board
N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical interface
SMB
N1PL3
a
,
N2PL3
Slot 23 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 3-port
electrical interface switching board
N1C34S
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical interface
SMB
N1PL3A,
N2PL3A
Slot 18,
1118 and
2631
Interfaces available on the front
panel
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical interface
SMB
N2PQ3 Slot 23 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 6-port
electrical interface switching board
N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical interface
SMB
N1PQ1A,
N2PQ1A
Slot 13 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 32-port
electrical interface switching board
N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface DB44
N1PQ1B,
N2PQ1B
Slot 13 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 32-port
electrical interface switching board
N1D12S
120-ohm E1
interface
DB44
N1PQM,
N1PQMA
Slot 13 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 32-port
electrical interface switching board
N1D12S and N1D12B
120-ohm E1
interface and
100-ohm T1
interface
DB44
N1DX1 Slots 13 and Interfaces available on the N x 64 RS449, EIA530,
EIA530-A, V.35,
DB28,
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 57 of 223

Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
1718 kbit/s interface board N1DM12 V.24, X.21, Framed
E1
DB44
a: The N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3, and N2PQ3 boards can work with the N1TSB8 board to
realize the TPS protection.

Table 3-16 PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot
N1DXA Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
N1DM12 Slots 1922 and 3538
N1TSB8 Slots 37 and 38
N1MU04 Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37
N1D75S Slots 1922 and 3538
N1D12S Slots 1922 and 3538
N1D12B Slots 1922 and 3538
N1C34S Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37
N1D34S Slots 1922 and 3538

3.4.5 Data Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards.
Table 3-18 lists the data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-19 lists the data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-17 Data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type Connector
N2EGS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
N3EGS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18,
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 58 of 223

Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type Connector
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
ZX
Interfaces available on
the 8-port 10/100M
Ethernet twisted pair
interface board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45 N1EFS0A Slots 23 and 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE
-FX
LC
Interfaces available on
the 8-port 10/100M
Ethernet twisted pair
interface board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45 N2EFS0,
N4EFS0
a

Slots 23 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE
-FX
LC
Interfaces available on
the 8-port 10/100M
Ethernet twisted pair
interface board
N1ETF8A
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45 N5EFS0 Slots 23 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8A
100BASE
-FX
LC
N1EFS4 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (622
Mbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
N3EFS4 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 Interfaces available on
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
N1EGT2 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
N2EGT2 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 59 of 223

Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type Connector
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slots 13 and 1718 (622 Mbit/s) Interfaces available on
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
twisted pair interface
board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX
RJ-45
N1EFT8
b

Slots 23 and 1718 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX
LC
N1EFT8A Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (622
Mbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
Interfaces available on
the 8-port 10/100M
Ethernet twisted pair
interface board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 2 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 23 and
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
N2EMR0
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 13 and
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45, LC
N2EGR2 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
N1EMS4 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 13 and
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 60 of 223

Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type Connector
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
twisted pair interface
board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 2 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 23 and
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
twisted pair interface
board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45
N1EMS2
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 23 and
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 23 and
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
N1EAS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (10 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
Interfaces available on
the front panel
10GBAS
E-LW/LR
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 61 of 223

Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type Connector
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (10 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25
Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
S-4.1,
L-4.1,
L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25
Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
Ie-1,
S-1.1,
L-1.1,
L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDL4 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25
Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
S-4.1,
L-4.1,
L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDQ1 Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25
Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
Ie-1,
S-1.1,
L-1.1,
L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1MST4 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18,
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on
the front panel
X3.296/(
DVB-ASI)
EN50083
-9,
200-M5-S
N-I,
200-SM-L
C-I
LC
a: The N2EFS0, N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 can be used with the N1ETS8 to realize the TPS protection.
b: The N1EFT8 provides eight FE electrical interfaces on the front panel. The N1EFT8 can be used
with the N1ETF8 to process 16-port FE electrical signals. The N1EFT8 can be used with the N1EFF8
to process eight FE electrical signals and eight FE optical signals.
Table 3-18 Data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot
N1ETF8, N1ETF8A Slots 1922 and 3538
N1EFF8, N1EFF8A Slots 1922 and 3538

3.4.6 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 62 of 223

Table 3-20 lists the WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 3-19 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode Connector
N1MR2A Slots 18, 1118
and 2631
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
N1MR2C Slots 1922 and
3538
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
N1LWX Slots 18, 1118
and 2631
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
TN11MR2 Slots 18, 1118
and 2631
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
TN11MR4 Slots 18, 1118
and 2631
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
TN11CMR2 Slots 18, 1118
and 2631
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
TN11CMR4 Slots 18, 1118
and 2631
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC

3.4.7 Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards.
Table 3-21 list the WDM boards, their valid and their interface slots for the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 3-20 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Connector
N1IFSD1 Slots 18, 1118 and
2631
Interfaces available on
the front panel
IF
N1RPWR Slots 18, 1118 and
2631
- Power supply
interface

3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.
Table 3-22 lists the optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface
in the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 63 of 223

Table 3-21 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface in the
OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode Connector
N1BA2 Slots 18, 1118 and
2631
Interfaces available on the
front panel
LC
N1BPA,
N2BPA
Slots 18, 1118 and
2631
Interfaces available on the
front panel
LC
N1DCU,
N2DCU
Slots 18, 1118 and
2631
Interfaces available on the
front panel
LC
61COA,
N1COA
a

Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on the
front panel
SC
62COA
a
Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on the
front panel
SC, E2000
ROP
a
Slot 103 Interfaces available on the
front panel
LC
N1RPC0
1
Slot 104 Interfaces available on the
front panel
LSH/APC,
LC/PC
N1RPC0
2
Slot 105 Interfaces available on the
front panel
LSH/APC,
LC/PC
a: The slots for the COA and ROP displayed on the T2000 are logical slots and not
physical slots.

3.4.9 Other Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
Table 3-23 lists the mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the
power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-22 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards
and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Connector
T1AUX Slot 34 SMB, RJ-45
T1EOW Slot 23 SMB, RJ-45
T1PIU Slots 32 and 33 Power supply interface
N1FANA Slots 3941 -
UPM
a
Slot 50 -
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in
the logical slot 50.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 64 of 223


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 65 of 223

4 Software Architecture
4.1 Overview
The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions
and works with other modules.
The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE
software and NM system.
The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer.
Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer
performs specific functions and provides service for the upper layer.
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 4-1.
In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System"
and "Board Software". The ASON software is also contained in the NE software.
Figure 4-1 Software architecture
High Level
Communication Module
Communication Module
Equipment Management
Module
NE software
Network Management
System
Board Software
Database
Management
Module
ASON software
Network side Module
Real-time
multi-task
operating
system

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 66 of 223

4.2 Communication Protocols
Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773,
Q.811 and Q.812.
Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and
NE (NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN).
At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS)
are provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is
developed on the basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1)
protocol stack.
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial
line internet protocol (SLIP).
4.3 Board Software
The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the
operation of the board.
It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to
the NE software through performance events and alarm.
The specific functions include:
l Alarm management
l Performance management
l Configuration management
l Communication management
It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements
ITU-T compliant specific functions of the NE.
4.4 NE Software
The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In
addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the
T2000 and the boards, so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.
According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom
management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF)
and OS function at network unit layer.
Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE
and other equipment (including NM and other NEs).
l Real-time multi-task operating system
l The NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to manage public
resources and support application programs.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 67 of 223

l It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an
application program execution environment, which is independent of the
processor hardware.
l Communication module
l The communication module is the interface module between NE software and
board software.
l According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software
and the board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the
equipment.
l Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from
the NE software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and
performance events of the board are reported to the NE software.
l Network Side (NS) Module
l The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment
management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side
(at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides
security control for the NE layer.
l Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
Qx interface module
Command line interface module
Security management module
l Equipment management module
l The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE
management. It includes administrator and agent.
l Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events.
l Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator,
implement the operations of the managed object, and send up events according
to the change of status of the managed object.
l High-level communication module
l The high-level communication module exchanges management information
among NEs and between the NM system and the NE.
l It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and
ECC communication module.
l Database management module
l The database management module is a part of the NE software.
l It includes two independent parts: data and program.
l The data are organized in the form of database, including network database,
alarm database, performance database and equipment database.
l The program manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.5 Network Management System
The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission
network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 68 of 223

In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates
standard management information model as well as object-oriented management
technology.
It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to
monitor and manage the network equipment.
The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the
transmission network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission
equipment.
The management functions of the NM software include:
l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks,
clears, and counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis
and fault diagnosis.
l Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and
prints performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and
resets performance register.
l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services,
trails, subnets and time.
l Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management,
NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft
terminal (LCT) access control of the equipment.
l Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser
shutdown (ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to
help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
l Querying service alarm: queries the current real alarms on the service path;
determines the connectivity or degrade status of the service, according to the
current alarm; analyzes the faulty node and locates the faulty board.
l Detecting the MS protection channel: detects the VC-4 channel alarms on the
VC-4 channel that maps the MS protection channel.
4.6 ASON Software
According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network
(ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the
T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is
where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol),
OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation
protocol-traffic engineering) protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly
includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and
the cross-connection management module.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 69 of 223

Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture
Cross-connection
management
module
NE
software
Signaling module
Routing module
T2000
AOSN software
LMP link management
module


Link Management Module
By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following
functions:
l Create and maintain control channels.
l Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following
functions:
l Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.
l Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l Collect and flood the TE link information.
l Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.
l Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module
The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l Create and delete cross-connections.
l Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 70 of 223

5 Data Features
5.1 Ethernet Features
This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet
features of the OptiX OSN 7500.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet
service requirements.
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH
transmission platform.
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet
service requirements.
Table 5-1, Table 5-2, Table 5-3, Table 5-4, Table 5-5, Table 5-6 and Table 5-7 list the
Ethernet boards that provide the switching function. Table 5-8 lists the Ethernet
boards that provide the transparent transmission function.
Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4
Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4, N3EFS4
Interface 4 FE 4 FE
Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX
Interface board None None
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1
q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 71 of 223

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4, N3EFS4
Uplink bandwidth 4 VC-4 8 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of VCTRUNKs 12 24
Ethernet private line
(EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private
line (EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private LAN
(EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private
LAN (EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F (FrameMapped GFP)
Link state pass
through (LPT)
Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Committed access rate
(CAR)
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Intra-board link
aggregation
Not supported Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported Supported, in compliance with
IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Ethernet performance
monitoring
Supported
NSF Function Not supported Supported
RMON Supported

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 72 of 223

Table 5-2 Function list of EFS0 and EFS0A
Function N2EFS0 N1EFS0A N4EFS0 N5EFS0
Interface 8 FE 16 FE 8 FE 8 FE
Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board N1ETS8
(used with
TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
N1ETS8
(used with
TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
N1ETS8
(used with
TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8,
N1ETF8A,
N1EFF8A
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 8 VC-4 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
24 32 24 24
Ethernet private line
(EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private LAN
(EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual
private LAN
(EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F,
LAPS, HDLC
GFP-F GFP-F,
LAPS,
HDLC
GFP-F
Link state pass
through (LPT)
Supports P2P
LPT
Supports
P2P and
P2MP LPT
Supports
P2P and
P2MP LPT
Supports
P2P and
P2MP LPT
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 73 of 223

Function N2EFS0 N1EFS0A N4EFS0 N5EFS0
Link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Committed access
rate (CAR)
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Intra-board link
aggregation
Supported Supported Supported Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported Supported,
in
compliance
with IEEE
802.1ag and
IEEE
802.3ah
Supported,
in
compliance
with IEEE
802.1ag and
802.3ah
Supported,
in
compliance
with IEEE
802.1ag and
IEEE
802.3ah
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
NSF Function Not supported Not
supported
Supported Not
supported
RMON Supported

Table 5-3 Function list of EGS2
Function N2EGS2 N3EGS2
Interface 2 GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE
802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of VCTRUNKs 48
EPL Supported
EVPL Supported
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 74 of 223

Function N2EGS2 N3EGS2
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F
LPT Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI
flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Not supported Not supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported Supported
RMON Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link
aggregation
Supports manual link
aggregation

Table 5-4 Function list of EGS4
Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4 N4EGS4
Interface 4 x GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame
format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 75 of 223

Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4 N4EGS4
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv
(x8)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
64
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P and
P2MP LPT
Supports P2P
and P2MP LPT
Supports P2P and
P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS Supported
PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with
IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and
distributed link aggregation.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 76 of 223

Table 5-5 Function list of EMS2
Function N1EMS2
Interface 2 GE and 16 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T,
100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board Supports 2 x GE if the N1EMS2 board is not used with an
interface board. Supports 2 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS2
board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
Service frame
format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
48
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Not supported
Static MPLS
label
Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS/PPS Not supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Not supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with
IEEE 802.3x.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 77 of 223

Function N1EMS2
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation

Table 5-6 Function list of EMS4
Function N1EMS4
Interface 4 GE and 16 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T,
100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board Supports 4 x GE if the N1EMS4 board is not used with an
interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS4
board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
Service frame
format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv
(x8)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
64
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS
label
Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 78 of 223

Function N1EMS4
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS/PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with
IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and
distributed link aggregation.

Table 5-7 Function list of EAS2
Function N1EAS2
Interface 2 x 10GE
Interface type 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR
Interface board None
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
64 VC-4
Mapping mode Virtual concatenation:
VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8)
Contiguous concatenations:
VC-4-4C
Number of
VCTRUNKs
24
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 79 of 223

Function N1EAS2
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS Label Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE
802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, PORT+VLAN flow, PORT+SVLAN flow
and PORT+SVLAN+CVLAN flow
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation,
and distributed link aggregation.

Table 5-8 Function list of EGT2, EFT8 and EFT8A
Function N1EGT2, N2EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A
Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX,
1000Base-LX,
1000Base-ZX
10Base-T,
100Base-TX,
100Base-FX
10Base-T,
100Base-TX
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 80 of 223

Function N1EGT2, N2EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A
Interface board None Supports 8 x FE if
the N1EFT8 board
is not used with an
interface board.
Supports 16 x FE if
the N1EFT8 board
is used with
interface boards
N1ETF8 and
N1EFF8.
None
Service frame
format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600
bytes
Supported by the latter four ports, 9600
bytes
Uplink
bandwidth
16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-3: VC-3-xv
(x24); VC-4:
VC-4-xv (x8)
VC-12: VC-12-xv
(x63); VC-3:
VC-3-xv (x3)
VC-12: VC-12-xv
(x63); VC-3:
VC-3-xv (x3)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
2 16 8
Ethernet
service types
Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported
MPLS Not supported
VLAN Transparent transmission
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Not supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported 802.1ag Not supported Not supported
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 81 of 223

5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH
transmission platform.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l EPL Service
l EVPL Service
l EPLAN Service
l EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services.
As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the
destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also
protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable
transmission of services.
Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
VCTRUNK 1
PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
POTR1
A
NE 1 NE 2
B
PORT2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
A
B


EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a
bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service
according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of
Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 82 of 223

Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters of
company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
NE 1 NE 2
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
Department 1
Department 2


l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 7500 adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3.
EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4.
EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
Community
user
Cyber cafe
user
OptiX OSN
equipment
VCTRUNK
A
A'
NE 1 NE 2
B
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN100
VLAN200
1 PORT2
1
PORT
PORT
PORT2
B'


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 83 of 223

Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS
NE 1 NE 2
P PE
P PE
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1 PORT1
PORT2
`
Add label
Department B
Department
A
Branch 1
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Strip label
Branch 2
Department B
Department A


Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ
NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1 PORT1
PORT2
`
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Add label Strip label
Department
B
Department
A
Branch 1
Branch 2
Department
B
Department
A


EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically
share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 7500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2
switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media
access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning.
The data packets are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the
destination MAC address, as shown in Figure 5-6.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 84 of 223

Figure 5-6 EPLAN service
NE 1
NE 2
NE3
1
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
PORT1 VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3 of
company A
Port 1
Department 1 of
company A
Access
point
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 1
Department 2 of
company A


EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in
the same VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same
VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the
EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 adopt
VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 85 of 223

Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service
NE 1
NE 2
NE3
PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
LSP
LSP PORT1
PORT2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
1
P
O
R
T
1
P
O
R
T
2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
2
S-Aware S-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3
of company B
Department 3
of company A
Port 2
Port 1
Port 1
Port 2
Department 2
of company B
Department 2
of company A Department 1
of company B
Department 1
of company A
Acess
point
Company A Company B
OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 2
C-Aware


5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
l LCAS
l The LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and
decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, the dynamic change of bearer
bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change) and protects
and restores failed members.
l For details, refer to .
l STP/RSTP
l The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid
spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically
modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the
RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology.
l For details, refer to STP and RSTP.
l Tributary protection switching (TPS)
l The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a
protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board.
This ensures a reliable operation of the equipment.
l For details, refer to 7.1.1 TPS Protection.
l Board protection switching (BPS)
l The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 86 of 223

detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the
services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service
protection.
l For details, refer to BPS.
l Port protection switching (PPS)
l The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services
of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection
switching for the entire board is not necessary.
l For details, refer to PPS.
l Link aggregation group (LAG)
l A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the
same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An
LAG can be regarded as one link.
l For details, refer to LAG.
l DLAG
l The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is
the protection board.
l During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not
switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the
equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between
two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node
should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets.
l The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.
l For details, refer to DLAG.
l LPT
l The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network,
when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the
LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty,
the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that
the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active
port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected.
l For details, refer to LPT.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP
At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP,
SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3
SNCP.
5.2 RPR Features
The RPR of the OptiX OSN 7500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can
quickly recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 87 of 223

l Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real
time.
l Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.
l Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node.
l Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
l Provide RPR protection.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are
in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-8. The outer ring and the inner ring
transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth
utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the
outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information on
the inner ring. The two rings protect each other.
Figure 5-8 RPR ring
Outer ring control
Node 1
Node 4
Node 3
Node 2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Inner ring data
Outer ring data
Inner ring control


5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery,
spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN
services.
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection
schemes.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 88 of 223

5.2.2 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery,
spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions
The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the RPR features
defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-9 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.
Table 5-9 Function list of RPR boards
Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE
Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Mapping granularity VC-3: VC-3-xv (x2); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8)
EVPL Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and
exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q.
Spanning tree Supports RSTP and STP.
IGMP Snooping Supported
RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering
protection schemes, with the protection switching time
being less than 50 ms.
Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.LAPS, compliant with
ITU-T X.86.
LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic
classification
Supports traffic classification based on PORT,
PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link
aggregation
Supported
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 89 of 223

Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Weighted fairness
algorithm
Supported
Topology
auto-discovery
Supported
Maximum number of
nodes
255
Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C

Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is
further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR
(committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 5-10 lists the differences among these classes.
Table 5-10 RPR service class
Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness
Algorithm
Application
A0 Pre-allocated,
irreclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time
services
A
A1 Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time
services
B_CIR Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Mediu
m
Irrelevant Near real-time
services
B
B_EIR Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High Relevant Near real-time
services
C C Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High Relevant Best effort
transmission

Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to
quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network.
Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS
function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without
affecting the existing services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 90 of 223

Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial
reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-9, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25
Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination
Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is
able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth
utilization is improved.
Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse
Node 1
Bandwidth of single ring is
1.25Gbit/s
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Traffic 1
1.25 Gbit/s
Traffic 2
1.25 Gbit/s


Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness
algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C
services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes
can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring
and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights
decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner
ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 5-10, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On
the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class
services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for
the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of
Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the
fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the
lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 91 of 223

Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
1
2
2
3
Traffic Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
1
Node3
Node4
Node Weight
Node2 1
1
1
Node 3
3


Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
1
2
Node 3
3
Node3
Node4
Node
Weight
Node2
1
3
2
2
3
Traffic
Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
600 Mbit/s
200 Mbit/s
1


5.2.3 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN
services.
EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
Figure 5-12 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional
EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 92 of 223

packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which
then strips the packet.
Figure 5-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification
is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of
Node 1.
Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Action
Tunnel
VC
Destination
Insertion
100
100
Node 4
LSP
Action
Tunnel
VC
Stripping
100
100
Action Forwarding
Node 4
FE/GE FE/GE
Node 2


Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE
FE
GE
Node 2 Node 4
Traffic Tunnel Destination
Port1+VLAN 2
VC
200 Node 2 200
Port1+VLAN 3 300 Node 3 300
Port1+VLAN 4 400 Node 4 400
FE
VLAN 2
VLAN 3
VLAN 4
VLAN 4
VLAN 3
VLAN 2


EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service
is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the
self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 93 of 223

Figure 5-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets
are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node
determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if
the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through
Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If
the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR
through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards
packets in the same way.
Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service
A2
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2 Node 4
MAC stack VLAN Port
A1 none
A2 none port 2
B1 100 rpr1
Port 1
B2 100 rpr1
C1 100 rpr1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
A1
B1
B2
C1
port 1
MAC forwarding table of node 1
MAC forwarding table of node 2
A2
MAC stack VLAN Port
A1 100
A2 100 rpr1
B1 none port 1
B2 none port 2
C1 100 rpr1
rpr1


5.2.4 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection
schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
l Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering
l When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an
automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect
the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
The advantages of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and
minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
l In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead,
the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that
is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on
the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The
disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching
speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
l In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the
ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and
decrease the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 94 of 223

new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is
sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the waste of
bandwidth.
l For details, refer to RPR.
l LCAS
l The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects
the bandwidth.
l For details, refer to LCAS.
l RSTP
l The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP
realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it
logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
l For details, refer to STP and RSTP.
l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP
l At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
l For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.
5.3 ATM Features
This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of
the OptiX OSN 7500.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function.
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an ADQ1 board
can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the
N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3
ATM services.
Table 5-11 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 95 of 223

Table 5-11 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1
Function ADL4 ADQ1
Front panel
interface
1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module
type
SFP
E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or
N1PL3A board.
IMA Not supported
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4
ATM switching
capability
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-3; VC-4: VC-4-xv (x4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and
QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM
multicast
connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection
Mode (ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection
operation mode
(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection
level (ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function
(ITU-T I.610)
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), RDI (Remote Defect
Indication), LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)

An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board
can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1
processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 5-12 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 96 of 223

Table 5-12 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1
Function IDL4 IDQ1
Front panel
interface
1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and
Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module
type
SFP
E3 ATM interface Not supported
IMA (compliant with
ATM Forum IMA
1.1 standards)
Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the
E1 processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQMA or N1PQM or
N2PQ1.
Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the
ATM port.
Each IMA group supports 132 E1 services. Supports the
mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any
IMA group) to the ATM port.
Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4
ATM switching
capability
1 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-12; VC-4: VC-4-xv (X4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and
QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM
multicast
connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection
Mode (ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection
operation mode
(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection
level (ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 97 of 223

Function IDL4 IDQ1
OAM function
(ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB, CC
Board level 1+1
protection
Supported, with switching time less than 1s

5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not
support ABR services.
l The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit
emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed
transmission bandwidth and latency.
l The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.
l The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.
l The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 7500 meets IETF
RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See
Table 5-13.
Table 5-13 ATM service types and traffic types
No. Traffic Type Service
Type
Parameter
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None
UBR.1 Clp01Pcr 2 atmNoClpNoScr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,
Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 98 of 223

No. Traffic Type Service
Type
Parameter
UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,
Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services
When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service
processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate
NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In
this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central
node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 5-15, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively
occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively
occupies a VC-4 bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at
NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the
ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
Figure 5-15 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
2.5 Gbit/s SDH
Ring
NE 2 NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATM
34M ATM
Traffic
155M ATM
622M ATM
Service
Convergence
DSLAM
DSLAM
Router
DSLAM
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 99 of 223

Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services
The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical
multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC
(VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 5-16, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and
sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1).
Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the
cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and
then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the
ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally
accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same
VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar.
One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
Figure 5-16 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
VC4-Xv
VP/VC-Ring
NE 2
NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
34M ATM
Traffic
155M ATM
Traffic
622M ATM
Traffic
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to
the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring
after converged with local service.
DSLAM
DSLAM
Router
DSLAM


Application of IMA Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM
integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links
are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface
of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not
process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer
are transparently transmitted.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the IMA service networking.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 100 of 223

Figure 5-17 IMA service networking
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP
ring
T2000
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
25km
35km
30km
40km
RNC
NodeB 1
NodeB 3
NodeB 2
NodeB 4


5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:
l ATM layer protections
l The ATM layer protections are classified in different ways. You can select a
combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1
bidirectional non-revertive protection.
l For details, refer to ATM/IMA.
l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP
l The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical
transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP,
and SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this
way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at
the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the
protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the
ATM layer is not performed).
l For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.
l 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
l The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection.
l For details, refer to ATM/IMA.
5.4 DDN Features
This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 101 of 223

5.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12
interface board to access and process DDN services.
5.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX
OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
5.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
5.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12
interface board to access and process DDN services.
Table 5-14 lists the functions and features of the DDN.
Table 5-14 Functions and features of DDN
Board Feature Description
Processing
capability
Processes eight N x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services,
and cross-connects 48 x 64 kbit/s and 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at
the system side.
Bandwidth at SDH
side
48 x E1,and 63 x E1.
Interface
specifications
N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24
and X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4.
Interface
impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms.
Connector type The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector
is used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is
used for framed E1 signals.
Protection Supports 1:N(N4) TPS protection with the switching time
being less than 50 ms.
Loopback Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports.
PRBS self-test Supported.
Alarm and
performance
A large number of alarms and performance events are
provided to facilitate the equipment management and
maintenance.

5.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX
OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 102 of 223

The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so
various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1
can be accessed to a transmission network.
l Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers
l Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
l Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
l Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for
small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and
security service halls.
Figure 5-18 DDN networking and application
Enterprise user OptiX NE
4 x 64k
NG-SDH
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Frame E1
Frame E1
4 x 64k Headquarters
of company A
Headquarters
of company B
Branch of
company A
Branch of
company B


As shown in Figure 5-18, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be
performed between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point
transmission of framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and
branches of Company B. The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1
services of Company B can also be transmitted in hybrid mode over the NG-SDH
network.
For details, see the Planning Guide.
5.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN
services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of
the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports one group of 1:N (N4) TPS protection for the N1DX1
boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 103 of 223

5.5 SAN Features
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing
board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and
DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
l The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the
port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.
l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and
FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board
also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one
FC200 (2125 Mbit/s) service or two FC100 services are supported.
l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH
side. FC100 (1062.5 Mbit/s )supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client
side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON (200 Mbit/s)or 4
x DVB-ASI (270 Mbit/s) services.
l All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T
G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 104 of 223

6 ASON Features
6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies
The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the
control links and TE links.
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links
The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links
The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about
its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 6-1. As a result, each NE
obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the
information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the
details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes
these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to
transmit and receive packets.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 105 of 223

Figure 6-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON Domain


When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically
discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the
management system for real-time display. See Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Management of control topology
R1
R2
R3
R4
: ASON NE
: User equipment

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 106 of 223

6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP,
the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the
entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that
is, the network-wide resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the
deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports
the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 6-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology
displayed on the NM in real time.
Figure 6-3 TE link auto-discovery
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4


6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration
The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very
convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON
services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node,
sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and
cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 107 of 223

network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link
to constrain the service routing.
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing
and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure
services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and
I in Figure 6-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures
cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A
to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is
assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
l Choose the bandwidth granularity.
l Choose the server level.
l Choose the source node.
l Choose the sink node.
l Create the service.
Figure 6-4 End-to-end service configuration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I


6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration
The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and
network security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability.
Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not
need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy
increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides
more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network
resources and enhance the network security.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 108 of 223

As shown in Figure 6-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network
calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
Figure 6-5 Trail restoration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I


6.4 ASON Clock Tracing
ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock
tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON
clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source.
The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is
avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with
many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20
ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet
generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet.
In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the
clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet
is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing
The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
l Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be
created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
l Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the
auto-tracing and auto-switching features.
l The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 109 of 223

Clock Protection Protocol
To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must
start the standard SSM protocol.
Primary Reference Clock Source
Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock
tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or
internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference
clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as
the primary clock reference source.
l Line clock source
l External clock source
l Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The
ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock
sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected
primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another
backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is
established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source.
As shown in Figure 6-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock
sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON
clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the
entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by
re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all
clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
Figure 6-6 ASON clock subnet
Primary base
clock source Standby base
clock source
A
BITS
BITS
B
:ASON NE
: BITS


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 110 of 223

Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according
to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an
available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical
interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this
way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing
sources for ASON NEs.
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is
configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and
the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the
clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are
selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used.
An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration
device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input
interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way,
clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also
strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet
The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
l The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest
clock quality.
l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON
clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority,
the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to
generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is
avoided.
l If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet
traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the
entire network are synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure
the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock
subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure
only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only
modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the
ASON clock subnet.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 111 of 223

Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM
disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality
and priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard
SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the
priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended
SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode.
Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the
primary reference clock source.
6.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the
service protection, as listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Service level
Service Protection and
Restoration Scheme
Implementation
Means
Switching and
Rerouting Time
Diamond
service
Protection and
restoration
SNCP and
rerouting
Switching time < 50ms
Rerouting time < 2 s
Gold
service
Protection and
restoration
MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms
Rerouting time < 2 s
Silver
service
Restoration Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s
Copper
service
No protection
No restoration
- -
Iron
service
Preemptable MSP -

Table 6-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 112 of 223

Table 6-2 TE links used by ASON services
Service Level Working
Resource of TE
Link
Protection
Resource of TE
Link
Non-Protection
Resource of TE
Link
Service
creation
Not used Not used Used
Service
rerouting
Not used Used when the
resource is not
enough
Used with the
priority
Diam
ond
servi
ce
Service
optimization
Not used Not used Used
Service
creation
Used with the
priority
Not used Used when the
resource is not
enough
Service
rerouting
Used with the
priority
Used when the
resource is not
enough
Used when the
resource is not
enough
Gold
servi
ce
Service
optimization
Used with the
priority
Not used Used when the
resource is not
enough
Service
creation
Not used Not used Used
Service
rerouting
Not used Used when the
resource is not
enough
Used with the
priority
Silve
r
servi
ce
Service
optimization
Not used Not used Used
Service
creation
Not used Not used Used Cop
per
servi
ce
Service
optimization
Not used Not used Used
Service
creation
Not used Used with the
priority
Used when the
resource is not
enough
Iron
servi
ce
Service
optimization
Not used Used with the
priority
Used when the
resource is not
enough

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 113 of 223

6.6 Diamond Services
Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources
in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond
services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking,
security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink
node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different
LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be
as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP.
The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the
same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the
working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 6-7 shows a diamond service.
Figure 6-7 Diamond Services
:ASON NE
:User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Protection LSP
Working LSP


There are three types of diamond services.
l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 6-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 6-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 6-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 114 of 223

Table 6-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between
the source node and the sink node.
Protection and
restoration
l
If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always
available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is
the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP.
l
If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be
reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure
the service survivability.
Rerouting
l
Supports rerouting lockout.
l
Supports rerouting priority.
l
Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever
possible
Do not use existing trails
whenever possible
Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and
Scheduled revertive.
l
After the automatically revertive diamond service is
rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the
original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l
After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted,
the user can set the service to be reverted to the original
path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to
30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is
rectified.
l
After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the
service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is
rectified.
Service migration
l
Supports migration between diamond services and
permanent SNCP connections.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and gold
services.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and
copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Support diamond ASON server trails.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 115 of 223

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 6-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements
for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration
l
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.
Rerouting is not triggered.
l
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby
LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l
When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is
triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting
l
Supports rerouting lockout.
l
Supports rerouting priority.
l
Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever
possible
Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and
Scheduled revertive.
l
After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted,
the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the
fault in the original path is rectified.
l
After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the
user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a
specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the
NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l
After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service
is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Service
migration
l
Supports migration between diamond services and permanent
SNCP connections.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and gold
services.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
Service
switching
Supports manual switching.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 116 of 223

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Service
optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service
association
Does not support service association.
ASON server
trail
Support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to
trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,
B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 6-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements
for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration
l
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby
LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.
Rerouting is not triggered.
l
When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not
triggered.
Service
migration
l
Supports migration between diamond services and permanent
SNCP connections.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and gold
services.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
Service
switching
Supports manual switching.
Service
optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service
association
Does not support service association.
ASON server
trail
Support diamond ASON server trails.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 117 of 223

6.7 Gold Services
Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with
diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links
or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is
cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex
section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 6-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 6-8 Gold services
R1
R2
R3
R4
:ASON NE
:User equipment
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
MSP
MSP
MSP
I


Table 6-6 lists the attributes of gold services.
Table 6-6 Attributes of gold services
Attribute Gold Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources
are available between the source node and the sink node.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 118 of 223

Multiplex section
protection
l
Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear
multiplex section protection chain to create gold
services.
l
Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear
multiplex section protection chain to create gold
services.
l
Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear
multiplex section protection chain to create gold
services.
l
Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
l
Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
Protection and
restoration
When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is
performed to protect services. When MS switching fails,
rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
Rerouting
l
Supports rerouting lockout.
l
Supports rerouting priority.
l
Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever
possible
Do not use existing trails
whenever possible
Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and
Scheduled revertive.
l
After the automatically revertive gold service is
rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the
original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l
After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted,
the user can set the service to be reverted to the original
path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes
to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is
rectified.
l
After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the
service is not reverted to the original route after the fault
is rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 119 of 223

Service migration
l
Supports migration between permanent connections
and gold services.
l
Supports migration between gold services and diamond
services.
l
Supports migration between gold services and silver
services.
l
Supports migration between gold services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

6.8 Silver Services
Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds.
The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low
real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON
triggers rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service
may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 6-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G
is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the
cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 120 of 223

Figure 6-9 A silver service
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
E
LSP after rerouting
Original LSP


Table 6-7 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 6-7 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available
between the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to
create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting
l
Supports rerouting lockout.
l
Supports rerouting priority.
l
Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever
possible
Do not use existing trails
whenever possible
Best route
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 121 of 223

Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and
Scheduled revertive.
l
After the automatically revertive silver service is
rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the
original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l
After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted,
the user can set the service to be reverted to the
original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10
minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the
original path is rectified.
l
After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the
service is not reverted to the original route after the fault
is rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh
restoration trail
Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for
revertive silver trials.
Service migration
l
Supports migration between permanent connections
and silver services.
l
Supports migration between diamond services and
silver services.
l
Supports migration between gold services and silver
services.
l
Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.
Service optimization
l
Supports service optimization.
l
If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be
optimized before reverting to its original route.
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

6.9 Copper Services
The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the
abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do
not reroute and are interrupted. Table 6-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 122 of 223

Table 6-8 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node.
Service
restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration
l
Supports migration between copper services and traditional
services.
l
Supports migration between copper services and diamond
services.
l
Supports migration between copper services and gold
services.
l
Supports migration between copper services and silver
services.
Service
optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service
association
Supports service association.
ASON server
trail
Supports ASON server trails.

6.10 Iron Services
The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured
as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the
services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply
non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs.
When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
l When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS
switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted.
After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption,
preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000.
l When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network
resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted
silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 6-9 lists the attributes of iron service.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 123 of 223

Table 6-9 Attributes of iron services
Attribute Iron Service
Requirements
for creation
Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are
available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex
section
protection
To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
l
Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
l
Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP
l
Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
l
Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service
restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service
migration
Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent
connections.
Service
optimization
Supports service optimization.

6.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as
ASON server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The
protection level for the tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use the
management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See
Figure 6-10.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 124 of 223

Figure 6-10 Tunnel
R1
R2
R3
R4
VC4 tunnel
VC12 service
: ASON NE
: User equipment
ASON domain


The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service
types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be
configured manually. As shown in Figure 6-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and
NE2 which can be a diamond ASON server trail, a gold ASON server trail, silver
ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON
automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line
boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order
cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or
optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink
nodes automatically switch to the new ports.

In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Figure 6-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12
NE1 NE2
VC12 ASON server trail
VC4
VC12
Cross-
connection
Line unit Tributary unit


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 125 of 223

Table 6-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.
Table 6-10 Attributes of tunnels
Attribute Diamond
Tunnel
Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel Copper
Tunnel
Requirem
ents for
creation
Same as
diamond
services
Same as gold
services
Same as silver
services
Same as
copper
services
Service
restoratio
n
Same as
diamond
services
Same as gold
services
Same as silver
services
Does not
support
rerouting
Rerouting
l
Supports
rerouting
lockout.
l
Supports
rerouting
priority.
l
Supports
rerouting
lockout.
l
Supports
rerouting
priority.
l
Supports
rerouting
lockout.
l
Supports
rerouting
priority.
Does not
support
rerouting
Revertive Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Pre-config
uration of
restoring
route
Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Service
associatio
n
Not supported Not supported Supported Supported
Service
migration
l
Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent
connections.
l
Supports migration between diamond tunnels and gold tunnels.
l
Supports migration between diamond tunnels and silver tunnels.
l
Supports migration between diamond tunnels and copper tunnels.
l
Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.
l
Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.
l
Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service
optimizati
on
Supports service optimization.
Tunnel
level
VC-4

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 126 of 223

6.12 Service Association
The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from
different points into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes.
During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the
route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services
(dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 6-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber
between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
Figure 6-12 Service association
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
1+1 protection
1+1 protection


Table 6-11 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 6-11 Attributes of service association
Attribute Service Association
Service creation Supports the creation of the associated services with the same
source node.
Service
optimization
Supports optimization of associated services.
Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated
service.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 127 of 223

Attribute Service Association
Service type
l
Supports the association of two silver services.
l
Supports association of two copper services.
l
Supports the association of a silver service and a copper
service.
l
Supports the association of two silver tunnels.
l
Supports the association of two copper tunnels.
l
Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.

6.13 Service Optimization
After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory
routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a
new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original
LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the
service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
l Only manual optimization is supported.
l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
l During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are
not allowed.
l During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting
operations, optimization is not allowed.
l The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper
and tunnel services.
6.14 Service Migration
OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON
services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion,
which would not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections
l Migration between gold services and permanent connections
l Migration between silver services and permanent connections
l Migration between copper services and permanent connections
l Migration between iron services and permanent connections
l Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 128 of 223

Service Migration between ASON Trails
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper service
l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper tunnels
6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes
After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original
routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON
service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the
services can be adjusted to the original route manually.
6.16 Preset Restoring Trail
Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail
failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for
restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold
ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset
restoring trail firstly.
6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of
rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a
restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service
uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh
restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only
partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are
used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be
faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 6-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver
services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver
service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh
restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the
service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver
services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for
the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 129 of 223

Figure 6-13 Shared mesh restoration trail
Revertive silver service 1
Share MESH
restoration trail 1
A B C
G
D E
F
H
Revertive silver service 2
Share MESH
restoration trail 2


Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
l Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh
restoration trail.
l A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at
different levels.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive
attribute cannot be changed.
l The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected
resources of TE links.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set
the preset restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration
Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following
differences.
l For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no
resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration
trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset
restoration trail cannot be used.
l For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The
reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can
be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization,
the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some
resources.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 130 of 223

6.18 Shared Risk Link Group
In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in
one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the
same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service
should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the
network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the
faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during
ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.
6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS
The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of
VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in
Figure 6-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1
and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all
Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on
either path if necessary.
Figure 6-14 LCAS (different path)
Router B Router A
NE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
Path 1
Path 2


If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the
service. As shown in Figure 6-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4
fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 131 of 223

Figure 6-15 LCAS (same path)
Router B Router A
NE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1


ASON Trail Group
An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within
one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To
provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as
separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each
ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and
sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 132 of 223

7 Protection
7.1 Equipment Level Protection
The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards
and 1+1 protection for power supplies.
7.1.1 TPS Protection
The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run
in a safe manner.
7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit
With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.
7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1
protection.
7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection.
7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit
The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
7.1.9 Intelligent Fans
Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the
temperature of the equipment.
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 133 of 223

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this
protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions
The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection
and overvoltage protection.
7.1.1 TPS Protection
The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 7-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 7-2 lists the
TPS protection parameters.
Table 7-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards
Service
Type
Protection
Scheme
Supported Boards Revertive Mode
E1/T1 One 1:N
protection (N
4)
N1PQM, N1PQMA,
N1PQ1, N2PQ1
a

E3/T3/E4/S
TM-1
One 1:N
protection (N
3)
N1PD3, N1PL3,
N2SPQ4, N2PQ3,
N2PD3, N2PL3,
N1SEP1
Ethernet One 1:1
protection
N2EFS0, N4EFS0,
N5EFS0, N1EFS0A
DDN One 1:N
protection (N
4)
N1DX1
Revertive
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.

Table 7-2 TPS protection parameters
Parameter Description
Priority 1X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is
the highest priority.
Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching,
and automatic switching.
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l
The clock of the working board is lost.
l
The working board is offline.
l
The working board is cold reset.
l
The hardware of the working board fails.
l
A switching command is issued.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 134 of 223

Parameter Description
Switching time 50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.

7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run
in a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the
cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1
hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table
7-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.
Table 7-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units
Parameter Description
Slots for working
and protection
boards
Slot 9 and slot 10
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l
The working board is offline.
l
The working board is cold reset.
l
The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is
triggered.
l
The hardware of the working board fails.
l
A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original
protection board becomes the working board, and the
original working board becomes the protection board.

7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit
With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, the GSCC board provides the system control and
communication (SCC) functions.
The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the
active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state.
Table 7-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 135 of 223

Table 7-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit
Parameter Description
Slots for working
and protection
boards
Slot 24 and slot 25
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l
The working board is offline.
l
The working board is under a cold reset.
l
The hardware of the working board fails.
l
A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original
protection board becomes the working board, and the
original working board becomes the protection board.

7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS
and DLAG protection.
The N1EAS2 board only supports the DLAG protection.
Table 7-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.
Table 7-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards
Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG
Slots for
working and
protection
boards
The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the bandwidth
of the working board.
Switching
condition
Any of the following conditions
triggers the switching:
l
The port status of the working
board is Link Down.
l
The clock of the working board
is lost.
l
The hardware of the working
board fails.
l
The working board is off line.
l
A switching command is
issued.
Any of the following conditions
triggers the switching:
l
The port to be protected on the
working board is in the Link
Down state.
l
The clock of the working board
is lost.
l
The hardware of the working
board fails.
l
The working board is off line.
l
The working board fails to
transmit and receive packets,
but the protection board
transmits and receives packets
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 136 of 223

Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG
successfully.
Switching
time
350 ms In full duplex mode: 4 s
In auto-negotiation mode: 500
ms
Revertive
mode
Non-revertive mode
l
Revertive (default)
l
Non-revertive

When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS or DLAG protection
switching, the following conditions must be met.
l The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same
working mode as the protection group.
l The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through
optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present
between the two ends.
l The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group
becomes abnormal.


The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end
of the protection group.
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1
protection.
The N1IDQ1 and N1IDL4 boards support the DPS. When the DPS needs to be
configured.
Table 7-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.
Table 7-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards
Parameter Description
Slots for working and
protection boards
Configured as required.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 137 of 223

Parameter Description
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l
A manual switching command is issued.
l
The working board is offline.
l
The working board is under a cold reset.
l
The power supply of the working board fails.
l
The clock of the working board fails.
l
The hardware of the working board fails.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time 50 ms

7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection.
Table 7-7 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards
Parameter Description
Switching condition (the
switching occurs if one condition
is met)
The hardware of the IF board or the IF unit is
faulty.
The hardware of the ODU is faulty.
POWER_FAIL
VOLT_LOS (IF board)
RADIO_TSL_HIGH
RADIO_TSL_LOW
RADIO_RSL_HIGH
IF_INPWR_ABN
CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
R_LOC
R_LOF
R_LOS
MW_LOF
MW_RDI
The board is offline.
Switching time 500 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300720 seconds (generally, set it to 600
seconds)

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 138 of 223

Table 7-8 N+1 protection for the microwave boards
Parameter Description
Switching condition (the
switching occurs if one condition
is met)
R_LOS
R_LOF
R_LOC
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
B2_SD(Optional condition)
MW_LOF
The board is offline.
Switching time 50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300720 seconds (generally, set it to 600
seconds)

7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit
The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
The OptiX OSN 7500 can access two 48 V DC power supplies by using two T1PIU
boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When
either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal
operation of the equipment.
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 7500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has
two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and
selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and
one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single
receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot
backup protection.
Table 7-9 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
Table 7-9 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX
Parameter Description
Slots for working and
protection boards
Configurable as required.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 139 of 223

Parameter Description
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l
The hardware of the working board fails.
l
A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time 50 ms

7.1.9 Intelligent Fans
Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the
temperature of the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation.
The power supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup.
The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure
detection. When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the
full speed. The running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators
on the front panel of the fan module.
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply
The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this
protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of
other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit
on the T1AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power
supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions
The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection
and overvoltage protection.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading
The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or
data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the
loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply
The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the
damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the
software can re-initialize the chip.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 140 of 223

The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can
affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to
unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the
power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection
Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and
timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high
temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about
cleaning the fans.
7.2 Network Level Protection
The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI
protection.
7.2.1 Linear MSP
The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1
dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
7.2.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP
ring.
7.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
7.2.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of
inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings,
which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different
protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node
failure.
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or
even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher
order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer
to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as
the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into
multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical
interface.
7.2.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 141 of 223

7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection
The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
7.2.1 Linear MSP
The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1
dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 1+1
and 1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 120 linear MSPs. In
the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the
protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in
ITU-T G.841.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Planning Guidelines.
7.2.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP
ring.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP
rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 7-10 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 7-10 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP Rings
Supported
STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring 7
STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring 14
STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring 22
STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 40

The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 has the following features.
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by
VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS
bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 142 of 223

Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without
interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an
STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section
For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 7500 is able to process
two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up
in one optical interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4
level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by
extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a
node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to
preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra
traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt
the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in
the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 7500 node sets up a detailed list
of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the
automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance
the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then
discards these services that may be misconnected.

The equipment supports the function of querying the MSP squelching. After the MS protocol
module triggers the MS squelching function and delivers the squelching status information to a
line board, the cross-connect board initiates a command to query the current MS squelching
status of the handshake detection board. Then, the cross-connect board compares the
squelching status with the relevant information stored on the cross-connect board. If the
squelching status is inconsistent with each other, the cross-connect board issues a command to
correct the MS squelching status.
7.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP of the VC-12, VC-3,
VC-4, and AU-3 services.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected
trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 7-1.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 143 of 223

Figure 7-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected
trail
NE1
NE4
NE3
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE7
NE6
The unprotected trail
NE1
NE4
NE3
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE7
NE6
The working trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trail Convert to an unprotected trail
The protction trail


The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 7500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP protection pairs.
In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected
trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an
SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level
operations are supported:
l Manual switching to protection path
l Manual switching to working path
l Forced switching to protection path
l Forced switching to working path
l Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting
l Revertive mode setting
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)
protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1
protection scheme.
The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 7500 support a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP
schemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 1008 SNCMP protection groups.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service
protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective
receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 144 of 223

Figure 7-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts
services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according
to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly
received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from
the working path.
Figure 7-2 Principle of multipath protection
Source Sink
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Protection 3
Intermediate
subnetworks
A B


In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 7-3, two protection paths protect a working
path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission
media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
Figure 7-3 SNCMP networking
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
Microware
Radio


When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure
7-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 145 of 223

Figure 7-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
Microware
Radio


When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both
become faulty, as shown in Figure 7-5, NE3 receives the service from the second
protection path Protection 2.
Figure 7-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
Microware
Radio


SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is
faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 896 SNCTP groups.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only
the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path.
When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all
services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant
only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not
occur.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 146 of 223

7.2.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of
inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings,
which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different
protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node
failure.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T
G.842.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
l Two SNCP rings
l An SNCP ring and an MSP ring
l Two MSP rings
Figure 7-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.
Figure 7-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
SNCP Ring
1
SNCP Ring
2
NE E
NE D NE C
NE F
NE G
NE A
Selecting Point
Forward Working Routing
Reverse Working Routing


When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.
l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.
l A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.
l NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.
l NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.
l NE C and NE E are faulty.
l NE D and NE F are faulty.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 147 of 223

The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is
faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or
even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher
order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer
to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as
the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
Figure 7-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Figure 7-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-16
SNCP
STM-16
MSP
STM-64
S
T
M
-
6
4


7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into
multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical
interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to
process multiple sets of independent K bytes. The T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SL64,
N1SLD64, N1SL16, N1SLO16, N2SL16, N1SF16, N3SL16, N1SF64, and N1SF64A
boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An
STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Up to
two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SF64 and SL64 boards
support STM-64 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in
the first and seventeenth VC-4s. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical
interface if the SF16 and SL16 boards support STM-16 optical interfaces. The two
sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and fifth VC-4s.
Figure 7-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by
the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 148 of 223

Figure 7-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4/16
Optical-path-
shared MSP ring
STM-16/64
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 STM-4/16
STM-4/16
Optical-path-
shared MSP ring


For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as
shown in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
STM-16
STM-16
STM-64
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2


The OptiX OSN 7500 also supports the line units at the same rate to form a shared
protection group in two directions, as shown in Figure 7-10. In this case, the west
STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.
Figure 7-10 One line shared by two lines at the same rate
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 149 of 223

7.2.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 7-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The
outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The
control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on
the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of
the data packets on the inner ring.
The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the
packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path
is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is,
insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and
stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet
ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because
a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.
Figure 7-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Inner ring
RPR


In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for
packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that
are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 7-12.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 150 of 223

Figure 7-12 RPR wrapping protection
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Inner ring
RPR
Wapping


The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case
of a fiber cut. See Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 RPR steering protection
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
RPR
Steering


In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse
direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection
switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and
the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a
mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that
the protection switching time is decreased.
7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection
The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 151 of 223

Figure 7-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The
VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be
applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes
and bandwidths.
Figure 7-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Working path
ATM
service
Protection path
ATM
service


The OptiX OSN 7500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels
(VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving
mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the
protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal
conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the
primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the
protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path,
and thus the ATM service is protected.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 152 of 223

8 OAM
8.1 Operation and Maintenance
The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 7500 are designed according to
the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the
equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 7500 provides powerful equipment maintenance
capability for customers.
Alarm and Performance Management
l In the case of an emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual
alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures.
l The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces,
four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation
interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.
l Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network
administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly.
l Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1000,
the NE reports that excessive alarms are generated. Then, the board does not
report excessive alarms.
l The NG-SDH equipment supports the alarm muting function. You can mute an
alarm by pressing the key on the GSCC board or by using the NM interface.
l The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically
monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant
alarms.
l The working temperature of certain boards can be queried.
l When an MSP switching or a TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a
performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service
administrator focuses on the service state only.
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the
SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
l When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is
generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for
500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 153 of 223

shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and
lasts for 2s every time.
l After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end
detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical
interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After
receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local
end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical
interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management
l The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH
and Ethernet optical interfaces.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH
optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface
type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance,
transmission rate, and wavelength.
l The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose
single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which
facilitates the maintenance.
l The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
Multiple Maintenance Methods
l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the orderwire phone function for management
personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other.
l The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and
alarms of each equipment in a network.
l The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE
software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely
loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the
equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone
network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 7500 system.
l The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N1PQMA, N2PQ1 line boards and cross-connect boards
support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This
function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this
function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel
the collection according to the requirement.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the board version replacement function. This
helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After
the replacement, the configuration and service status of the board of a new
version are the same as the configuration and service status of the board of a old
version old.
l Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically
detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
l The alarms of the services can be queried.
l The connectivity status of the services can be determined.
l The faulty node can be analyzed.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 154 of 223

l The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and
controlled. After being inserted, the board does not work if the total power
consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the
equipment.
l The port status can be queried.
l The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities
can be traced to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities.
l The enabling state of detecting the alarms in the MSP protection path can be
queried.
l The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted
according to the daylight saving time in the country.
8.2 Network Management
The OptiX OSN 7500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000
transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH,
Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T
Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and
the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with
the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and
management over the network equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP),
which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different
vendors.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 155 of 223

9 Security Management
9.1 Authentication Management
Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
l NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a
valid user name and a valid password.
l NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each
time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE
simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique.
l Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by
simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from
illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at
lower level exit from the NE.
l NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower
than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
l NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to
prevent other users from operating the locked modules.
l Query the online NE users.
9.2 Authorization Management
Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful
operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
l NE user management:
According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels,
which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system
level, and debugging level in an ascending order.
According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE
users, CMD NE users, and general NE users.
Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.
Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority,
or change the user flag.
Delete NE users.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 156 of 223

l NE user group management:
According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided
into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group,
monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group.
Modify the group of a user.
9.3 Network Security Management
Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000
to effectively manage the NEs.
l The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL)
protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
l Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the
network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the
ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule
only to check the source address of the IP packets only.
For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL
rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source
port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets.
If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the
advanced ACL rule to check the packets.
Query the ACL rule.
Modify the ACL rule.
Delete the ACL rule.
l An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:
Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to
access it over the Ethernet network.
Access through the serial interface.
Access through the OAM port.
Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized
or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM
access function can be enabled when necessary.
l Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to
manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the
T2000.
l When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user
name and password) is encrypted.
9.4 System Security Management
Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be
executed forcibly.
l Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 157 of 223

l Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report
an alarm after a user logs in to the NE.
l Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.
l Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.
l Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.
l Query or set the password uniqueness.
9.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides log management functions.
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the
operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the
operations.
9.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an
NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are
transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog)
protocol.
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the
operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the
operations.
l Query the security logs of the NE.
l Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
9.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an
NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are
transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog)
protocol.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports:
l Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol
l Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP
l Adding and deletion of Syslog servers
l Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers
at the same time
l Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog
server and the NE
Figure 9-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the
security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available
in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 158 of 223

the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through
several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
Figure 9-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NMS
Syslog Server A
Syslog Server B
real time
security log
TCP/IP
NE A
(client)
NE B
NE C
(client)
NE D
ECC/ IP OVER DCC



Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system
logs of all NEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the
system log server. In Figure 9-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly
communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence,
configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to
transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of
IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not
directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs
of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the
Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by
the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example,
configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D.
For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Optical
Switching System Configuration Guide.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 159 of 223

10 Technical Specifications
10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment
The overall specifications of the equipment include the specifications of the cabinet,
specifications of the subrack, power supply parameters, timeslot numbering, laser
safety class, timing and synchronization performance, transmission performance,
protection performance, and environmental specification.
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and
number of permitted subracks.
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and
maximum power consumption.
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters
The equipment supports the access of the 48 V or 60 V DC power.
10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering
The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
10.1.5 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
10.1.7 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
10.1.8 Protection Performance
The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 160 of 223

The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127
standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) related tests.
10.1.10 Environmental Specification
The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and
number of permitted subracks.
Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of Permitted
Subracks
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000
(H) (T63E)
55 1
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000
(H) (N63E)
42 1
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000
(H)
79 1
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200
(H) (T63E)
60 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200
(H) (N63E)
45 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200
(H)
84 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600
(H) (T63E)
70 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600
(H)
94 2

10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and
maximum power consumption.
Table 10-2 lists the dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Table 10-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
496.4 (W) x 295 (D) x 756.7 (H) 30 (net weight of the subrack that
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 161 of 223

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
is not installed with boards)

Table 10-3 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Table 10-3 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Maximum Power Consumption Fuse Capacity
1000 W 32 A

10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters
The equipment supports the access of the 48 V or 60 V DC power.
Table 10-4 lists the power supply parameters.
Table 10-4 Power supply parameters
Item Specification
Power supply mode DC power supply
Nominal voltage 48 V or 60 V
Voltage range 38.4 V to 57.6 V or 48 V to 72 V
Maximum power
consumption
1000 W
Maximum current 25 A

10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering
The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 describe the two TU-12 numbering schemes of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Table 10-5 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme I)
TUG2
(7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG
(7-4)
TUG
(7-5)
TUG
(7-6)
TUG
(7-7)
TU-3
(3-1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
TU-3
(3-2)
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
3
0
3
1
3
2
3
3
3
4
3
5
3
6
3
7
3
8
3
9
4
0
4
1
4
2
TU-3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 162 of 223

TUG2
(7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG
(7-4)
TUG
(7-5)
TUG
(7-6)
TUG
(7-7)
(3-3) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3

Table 10-6 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme II)
TUG2
(7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG2
(7-4)
TUG2
(7-5)
TUG2
(7-6)
TUG2
(7-7)
TU-3
(3-1)
1 2
2
4
3
4 2
5
4
6
7 2
8
4
9
1
0
3
1
5
2
1
3
3
4
5
5
1
6
3
7
5
8
1
9
4
0
6
1
TU-3
(3-2)
2 2
3
4
4
5 2
6
4
7
8 2
9
5
0
1
1
3
2
5
3
1
4
3
5
5
6
1
7
3
8
5
9
2
0
4
1
6
2
TU-3
(3-3)
3 2
4
4
5
6 2
7
4
8
9 3
0
5
1
1
2
3
3
5
4
1
5
3
6
5
7
1
8
3
9
6
0
2
1
4
2
6
3

10.1.5 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
Table 10-7 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards.
Table 10-7 Laser safety class
Laser Safety
Class
Board
Class 1 N1SL64, T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SF64, N1SF64A, N1SLD64,
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N1SLO16,
N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4,
N3SLO1, N3SLN, N3SLQ41, N3SLD41, N3SL41, N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SLT1,
N3SLT1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A,
N2SL1, N1SLH1, N1SLH1A, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGT2,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4,
N1EAS2, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4,
N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8
Class 4 N1RPC01, N1RPC02
Class 1M BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A,
N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4,
TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4, N1IFSD1

10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 163 of 223

Table 10-8 lists the timing and synchronization performance.
Table 10-8 Timing and synchronization performance
Performance Description
Output Jitter ITU-T G.813 compliant
Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant

10.1.7 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 10-9 lists the transmission performance.
Table 10-9 Transmission performance
Performance Description
Jitter at STM-N Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825
Jitter at PDH Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783
Bit Error Compliant with ITU-T G.826

10.1.8 Protection Performance
The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
Linear MSP
Table 10-10 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 10-10 Linear MSP parameters
Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Protocol
Switching
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
single-ended
switching
Non-revert
ive
Not
required
50 ms -
1+1
single-ended
switching
Revertive Not
required
50 ms 600s
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Non-revert
ive
APS
protocol
50 ms -
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
l
R_LOS
l
R_LOF
l
MS_AIS
l
B2_EXC
B2_SD
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 164 of 223

Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Protocol
Switching
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Revertive APS
protocol
50 ms 600s
1:N (N14)
dual-ended
switching
Revertive APS
protocol
50 ms 600s

MSP Ring
Table 10-11 lists the MSP ring parameters.
Table 10-11 MSP ring parameters
Protection
Type
Revertiv
e Mode
Switching Mode Switchi
ng
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
Two-fiber
bidirectiona
l MSP
Revertive
l
Forced
switching
l
Manual
switching
l
Exercise
switching
50 ms 600s
Two-fiber
unidirection
al MSP
Revertive
l
Forced
switching
l
Manual
switching
l
Exercise
switching
50 ms 600s
Four-fiber
bidirectiona
l MSP
Revertive
l
Forced
switching - ring
l
Manual
switching - ring
l
Exercise
switching - ring
l
Forced
switching - span
l
Manual
switching - span
l
Exercise
switching - span
50 ms 600s
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
l
R_LOS
l
R_LOF
l
MS_AIS
l
B2_EXC
l
B2_SD
l
Forced
switching
l
Manual
switching
l
Exercise
switching

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 165 of 223

SNCP
Table 10-12 lists the SNCP parameters.
Table 10-12 SNCP parameters
Protectio
n Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Time
Default
WTR Time
Switching Conditions
Revertive 50 ms 600s SNCP
Non-rever
tive
50 ms -
Any of the following alarms
triggers the switching of VC4
level SNCP:
l
R_LOS
l
R_LOF
l
R_LOC
l
MS_AIS
l
B2_EXC
l
AU_AIS
l
AU_LOP
l
B3_EXC (Optional)
l
B3_SD (Optional)
l
HP_UNEQ (Optional)
l
HP_TIM (Optional)
Any of the following alarms
triggers the switching of VC3
level SNCP:
l
TU_LOP
l
TU_AIS
l
B3_EXC (Optional)
l
B3_SD (Optional)
Any of the following alarms
triggers the switching of VC12
level SNCP:
l
TU_LOP
l
TU_AIS
l
BIP_EXC (Optional)
l
BIP_SD (Optional)

10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127
standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) related tests.
Table 10-13 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 166 of 223

Table 10-13 EMC test results
Item Standard
Radiated emission CISPR22 Class
AEN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for DC ports CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal
ports
CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Immunity to radiated
electromagnetic field
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz2700 MHz: 10 V/m)
Immunity to electrostatic
discharge
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: 8 kV; contact
discharge: 6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast
transient bursts for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast
transient bursts for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2
IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV)
Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: 1 kV, line to
ground: 2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal
ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV)
Immunity to continuous
conducted interference for DC
ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous
conducted interference for signal
ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous voltage
dips and short interruption and
voltage variation for DC power
port
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-29

10.1.10 Environmental Specification
The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in
Table 10-14.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 167 of 223

Table 10-14 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Specifications Description
Altitude 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0 to 45
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismic
performance
Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD

10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4
optical interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored
optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic
also provides information on wavelength allocation.
10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces.
10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces.
10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces.
10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces.
10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation
This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical
interfaces.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 168 of 223

10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces.
Table 10-15 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Table 10-15 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Application code I-1 Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to
100
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to
1360
1260 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
15 to
8
19 to
14
15 to
8
5 to 0 5 to 0 3 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
23 31 28 34 34 34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
8 14 8 10 10 10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 8.2 10 10 10

10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces.
Table 10-16 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Table 10-16 Parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s
Application code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to
100
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 169 of 223

Parameter Value
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical power
range (dBm)
15 to 8 15 to
8
3 to 2 3 to 2 3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) 23 28 28 28 34
Minimum overload (dBm) 8 8 8 8 13
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5

10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces.
Table 10-17 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-17 Parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit
rate
2488320 kbit/s
Application
code
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2J
e
V-16.2J
e (BA)
U-16.2J
e
(BA+PA
)
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 25 25 to
50
50 to
80
80 to
105
105 to
145
145 to
200
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1266
to
1360
1260 to
1360
1280 to
1335
1500
to
1580
1530 to
1560
1530 to
1565
1550.12
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 170 of 223

Parameter Value
Without
the
booster
amplifie
r (BA):
2 to
+3
Without
the BA
or
pre-amp
lifier
(PA): 2
to +3
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
10
to 3
5 to 0 2 to
+3
2 to
+3
5 to +7
With
the BA:
13 to
15
With the
BA: 15
to 18
Without
the BA
or PA:
28
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
18 18 27 28 28 28
With the
PA: 32
Without
the BA
or PA:
9
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
3 0 9 9 9 9
With the
PA: 10
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
12 - - 1200
to
1600
2000 2800 3400
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Table 10-18 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of
the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-18 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 2666057 kbit/s
Application code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f
Meaning of the code
a
FEC + BA (14
dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17
dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17 dB) +
RA + PA
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 171 of 223

Parameter Value
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Without the
BA or PA: 5
to 1
Without the
BA or PA: 5
to 1
Without the BA, RA,
or PA: 5 to 1
Launched optical power
range (dBm)
With the BA:
13 to 15
With the BA:
13 to 15
With the BA: 15 to
18
Without the
BA or PA:
27.5
Without the
BA or PA:
27.5
Without the BA, RA,
or PA: 27.5
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
With the PA:
37
With the PA:
37
With the PA: 42
Minimum overload (dBm)
b
10 10 10
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
c

10 10 10
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For
example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14
dBm. "FEC + BA + PA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are
measured when the FEC, BA, and PA are used.
b: The parameter values are only for the PA.
c: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of
the amplifier are not provided.

10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces.
Table 10-19 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-19 Parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2
b
L-64.2
b (BA)
Le-64.
2
Ls-64.
2
V-64.2b
(BA+PA+
DCU)
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 0 to
25
2 to 35 35 to
80
35 to
55
55 to
75
80 to 152
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 172 of 223

Parameter Value
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290
to
1330
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1550.12
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Withou
t the
BA: 4
to +2
Without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU: 4
to 1
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
6 to
1
5 to
1
1 to
+2
With
the BA:
13 to
15
2 to 4 4 to 7
With the
BA: 13 to
15
Without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU: 14
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
11 14 14 14 21 21
With the
PA: 26
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
1 1 1 1 8 8 1
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
6.6 500 800 1600 1200 1600 2040 (with
the DCU)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
6 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Table 10-20 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of
the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-20 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 10709225 kbit/s
Application code Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
Meaning of the
code
a

FEC + BA (14 dB)
+ PA + DCU (60 +
80)
c

FEC + BA (17 dB) +
PA + DCU (80 x 2)
FEC + BA (17 dB)
+ RA + PA + DCU
(60 x 3)
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 173 of 223

Parameter Value
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
b

4 to 1 4 to 1 4 to 1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
b

14 14 14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
b

1 1 1
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
b

10 10 10
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
b

800 800 800
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For
example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14
dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface
are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier (RA) are used.
b: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of
the amplifier and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided.
c: The parameter values indicate the distances that correspond to different
dispersion compensation values.

10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Table 10-21 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-21 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s 2666057
kbit/s
9953280
kbit/s
10709225
kbit/s
Dispersion-limite
d distance (km)
170 640 640 40 40
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 174 of 223

Parameter Value
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
2 to
+3
5 to 1 5 to 1 4 to 1 4 to 1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
28 28 28 14 14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
9 9 9 1 1
Maximum
allowed
dispersion
(ps/nm)
3400 12800 12800 800 800
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 10 10 10 10
With the
FEC: 16
With the
FEC: 20
Optical
signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
(dB)
Without the FEC:
21
Without the
FEC: 21
Without the
FEC: 26
Without the
FEC: 26

10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation
This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500.
The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the output
of the wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be
directly added to the WDM system. Table 10-22 provides the wavelength allocation
information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces.
Table 10-22 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical
interfaces
No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53
2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73
3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94
4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14
5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35
6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56
7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77
8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 175 of 223

No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19
10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40
11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61
12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82
13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04
14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25
15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47
16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68
17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90
18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12
19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33
20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55

10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
The characteristics of the 10-Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500 comply with IEEE 802.3ae. The characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical
interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3z. The characteristics of the
100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE
802.3u. Table 10-23 lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces.
Table 10-23 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Type of
Interface
Type
of
Fiber
Launched
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Operatin
g
Wavelen
gth
Range
(nm)
Minimu
m
Overload
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Extinctio
n Ratio
(dB)
1000BAS
E-ZX (80
km)
Single-
mode
LC
2 to +5 1500 to
1580
3 22 9
1000BAS
E-VX (40
km)
Single-
mode
LC
4.5 to 0 1275 to
1350
3 23 9
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 176 of 223

Type of
Interface
Type
of
Fiber
Launched
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Operatin
g
Wavelen
gth
Range
(nm)
Minimu
m
Overload
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Extinctio
n Ratio
(dB)
1000BAS
E-LX (10
km)
Single-
mode
LC
9 to 3 1270 to
1355
3 19 9
1000BAS
E-SX
(0.5 km)
Multi-
mode
LC
9.5 to 0 770 to
860
0 17 9
100BAS
E-FX (15
km)
Single-
mode
LC
15 to 8 1261 to
1360
7 28 10
100BAS
E-FX (2
km)
Single-
mode
LC
19 to 14 1270 to
1380
14 30 10
10GBAS
E-LR
(LAN)
Single-
mode
LC
-6 to -1 1260 to
1355
0.5 -12.6 3.5
10GBAS
E-LW
(WAN)
Single-
mode
LC
-6 to -1 1260 to
1355
0.5 -12.6 3.5

10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical
interfaces.
Table 10-24 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-25 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-24 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Application code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 177 of 223

Parameter Value
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1260 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
19 to
14
15 to 8 5 to 0 5 to 0 3 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
31 28 34 34 34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
14 8 10 10 10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10 10

Table 10-25 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s
Application code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
28 28 28 34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
8 8 8 13
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10 10.5

10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces and DDN
electrical interfaces.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 178 of 223

10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
Table 10-26 lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-26 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces
Type of
Electrical
Interface
1544
kbit/s
2048
kbit/s
34368
kbit/s
44736
kbit/s
139264
kbit/s
155520
kbit/s
Line code
pattern
B8ZS,
AMI
HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI
Signal bit rate
at the output
interface
Complies with
ITU-T G.703.
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Allowed
frequency
deviation at the
input interface
Allowed
attenuation at
the input
interface
Input jitter
tolerance


10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 10-27 lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 10-27 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces
Type of
Interface
Description Standard
Framed E1
interface
Framed E1
signal
The physical and electrical characteristics of
the interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The
frame structure of the interface complies with
ITU-T G.704.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 179 of 223

Type of
Interface
Description Standard
V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449
interface
Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and
RS-422A).
RS-530
interface
Complies with EIA RS-530.
Nx64 kbit/s
interface
RS-530A
interface
Complies with EIA RS-530A.

10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces,
RS-232 interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces.
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications
The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.
10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications
The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the clock interface are listed as Table 10-28.
Table 10-28 Specifications of the clock interface
Specifications Description
Output frequency
accuracy
Compliant with G.813
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 180 of 223

Specifications Description
Output jitter 0.05 UIpp

10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface are listed as Table 10-29.
Table 10-29 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate 64 kbit/s
Timing signals From RX
Coding style Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Compliant Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Output interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Incoming interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703

10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
The specifications of the RS-232 interface are listed as Table 10-30.
Table 10-30 Specifications of the RS-232 interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels 5V15V

10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.
The specifications of the RS-422 interface are listed as Table 10-31.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 181 of 223

Table 10-31 Specifications of the RS-422 interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels 2.0V

10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface are listed as Table 10-32.
Table 10-32 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface
Specifications Description
Speech channel interface
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz3400 Hz
Operating current 18 mA
Input gain 4/0/0 dB
Output gain 0/7/0 dB
Signalling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Rec. Q.23
Analog EOW extension
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz3400 Hz
Tx level 3.5 dBr 1 dBr
Rx level 3.5 dBr 1 dBr

10.5 Microwave RF Performance
This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity,
transceiver performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal
processing performance of the modem, and link reliability.
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH
microwave frames.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 182 of 223

10.5.2 Frequency Band
Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands.
10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity
Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities.
10.5.4 Transceiver Performance
Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances.
10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance
The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for
fighting against multipath fading.
10.5.6 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M
signals.
10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the
performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for
baseband signals.
10.5.8 Equipment Reliability
The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different
link reliabilities.
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH
microwave frames.
Table 10-33 Radio work modes
Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
4E1 QPSK 7
4E1 16QAM 3.5
8E1 QPSK 14 (13.75)
8E1 16QAM 7
16E1 QPSK 28 (27.5)
16E1 16QAM 14 (13.75)
STM-1 128QAM 28
22E1 32QAM 14 (13.75)
26E1 64QAM 14 (13.75)
32E1 128QAM 14 (13.75)
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 183 of 223

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
35E1 16QAM 28 (27.5)
44E1 32QAM 28 (27.5)
53E1 64QAM 28 (27.5)


l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by
the OptiX RTN 600. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
10.5.2 Frequency Band
Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports two types of ODUs, that is, standard power ODU
(SP ODU) and high power ODU (HP ODU). The following three table respectively list
the frequency information on three types of ODUs, that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and
HP ODU.
Table 10-34 Frequency Band (SP ODU)
Frequency
Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
7 GHz 7.0937.897 154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245
8 GHz 7.7318.496 119, 126, 266, 311.32
11 GHz 10.67511.745 490, 500, 530
13 GHz 12.75113.248 266
15 GHz 14.40315.348 315, 322, 420, 490, 728
18 GHz 17.68519.710 1008, 1010, 1560
23 GHz 21.20023.618 1008, 1200, 1232
26 GHz 24.54926.453 1008
38 GHz 37.04439.452 1260

Table 10-35 Frequency Band (SPA ODU)
Frequency
Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
6 GHz 5.8506.425 (L6)
6.4257.125 (U6)
252.04, 300 (L6)
340 (U6)
7 GHz 7.0937.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 184 of 223

Frequency
Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
8 GHz 8.2798.496 119, 126, 266, 311.32
11 GHz 10.70011.700 490, 500, 530
13 GHz 12.75113.248 266
15 GHz 14.40015.358 420, 490
18 GHz 17.68519.710 1008, 1010
23 GHz 21.20023.618 1008, 1232

Table 10-36 Frequency Band (HP ODU)
Frequency
Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
7 GHz 7.0937.897 154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245
8 GHz 7.7318.497 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266,
311.32
11 GHz 10.67511.745 490, 500, 530
13 GHz 12.75113.248 266
15 GHz 14.40015.358 315, 322, 420, 475, 490, 640, 644,
728
18 GHz 17.68519.710 1008, 1010, 1560
23 GHz 21.20023.618 1008, 1200, 1232
26 GHz 24.25026.453 800, 1008
32 GHz 31.81533.383 812
38 GHz 37.04440.105 700, 1260

10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity
Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 185 of 223


l For a guaranteed value, remove 3 dB from the typical value.
l As listed in the following three tables, the radio work modes corresponding to the receiver
sensitivity use the microwave frame structure based on TU or STM-1.
Table 10-37 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (i)
Performance
4xE1 8xE1 16xE1
Item
QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM
RSL@BER=10
6
(dBm)
@6GHz 91.5 87.5 88.5 84.5 85.5 81.5
@7GHz 91.5 87.5 88.5 84.5 85.5 81.5
@8GHz 91.5 87.5 88.5 84.5 85.5 81.5
@11GHz 91.0 87.0 88.0 84.0 85.0 81.0
@13GHz 91.0 87.0 88.0 84.0 85.0 81.0
@15GHz 91.0 87.0 88.0 84.0 85.0 81.0
@18GHz 91.0 87.0 88.0 84.0 85.0 81.0
@23GHz 90.5 86.5 87.5 83.5 84.5 80.5
@26GHz 90.0 86.0 87.0 83.0 84.0 80.0
@32GHz 89.0 85.0 86.0 82.0 83.0 79.0
@38GHz 88.5 84.5 85.5 81.5 82.5 78.5

Table 10-38 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (ii)
Performance
22xE1 26xE1 32xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1
Item
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM
RSL@BER=10
6
(dBm)
@6GHz 80.5 76.5 73.0 79.0 77.5 73.5
@7GHz 80.5 76.5 73.0 79.0 77.5 73.5
@8GHz 80.5 76.5 73.0 79.0 77.5 73.5
@11GHz 80.0 76.0 72.5 78.5 77.0 73.0
@13GHz 80.0 76.0 72.5 78.5 77.0 73.0
@15GHz 80.0 76.0 72.5 78.5 77.0 73.0
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 186 of 223

Performance
22xE1 26xE1 32xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1
Item
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM
@18GHz 80.0 76.0 72.5 78.5 77.0 73.0
@23GHz 79.5 75.5 72.0 78.0 76.5 72.5
@26GHz 79.0 75.0 71.5 77.5 76.0 72.0
@32GHz 78.0 74.0 70.5 76.5 75.0 71.0
@38GHz 77.5 73.5 70.0 76.0 74.5 70.5

Table 10-39 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (iii)
Performance
STM-1
Item
128QAM
RSL@BER=10
6
(dBm)
@6GHz 69.5
@7GHz 69.5
@8GHz 69.5
@11GHz 69.0
@13GHz 69.0
@15GHz 69.0
@18GHz 69.0
@23GHz 68.5
@26GHz 68.0
@32GHz 67.0
@38GHz 66.5

10.5.4 Transceiver Performance
Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances.
The following three table lists the transceiver performances of three types of ODUs,
that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and HP ODU.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 187 of 223

Table 10-40 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@7GHz 25.5 21.0 15.0
@8GHz 25.5 21.0 15.0
@11GHz 24.5 20 14
@13GHz 24.5 20 14
@15GHz 24.5 20 14
@18GHz 24 20 14
@23GHz 22.5 19 13
@26GHz 22 18 12
@38GHz 20.5 16 10
Nominal
minimum
transmit power
(dBm)
4
Nominal
maximum receive
power (dBm)
20
Frequency
stability (ppm)
5

Table 10-41 Transceiver Performance (SPA ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@6GHz 26.5 24.0 23.0
@7GHz 25.5 21.5 20.0
@8GHz 25.5 21.5 20.0
@11GHz 24.5 22 18
@13GHz 24.5 20 18
@15GHz 24.5 20 18
@18GHz 22.5 19 17
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 188 of 223

Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
@23GHz 22.5 19 16
Nominal minimum
transmit power
(dBm)
0
Nominal
maximum receive
power (dBm)
20
Frequency
stability (ppm)
5

Table 10-42 Transceiver Performance (HP ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@7GHz 30 28 24
@8GHz 30 28 24
@11GHz 28 26 21
@13GHz 26 23 18
@15GHz 26 23 18
@18GHz 25.5 22 17
@23GHz 25 22 17
@26GHz 25 22 17
@32GHz 23 21 16
@38GHz 23 20 16
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
@7GHz 9
@8GHz 9
@11GHz 6
@13GHz 3
@15GHz 3
@18GHz 2
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 189 of 223

Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
@23GHz 2
@26GHz 2
@32GHz 1
@38GHz 1
Nominal
maximum receive
power (dBm)
20
Frequency
stability (ppm)
5

10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance
The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for
fighting against multipath fading.
Table 10-43 Anti-multipath fading performance
Item Performance
STM-1/128QAM W-curve See Figure 10-1.
STM-1/128QAM W-curve 51 dB.

Figure 10-1 W-curve


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 190 of 223

10.5.6 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M
signals.
Table 10-44 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation scheme ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the
performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for
baseband signals.
Table 10-45 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode
l
Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals
l
Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH signals
Adaptive
time-domain
equalizer for
baseband
signals
Consisting of the 24-tap feed forward equalizer filter and the
3-tap decision feedback equalizer.

10.5.8 Equipment Reliability
The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different
link reliabilities.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 191 of 223

Table 10-46 Link reliability per hop
Performance Item
1+0 Non-protection
Configuration
1+1 Protection Configuration
MTBF (h) 14.71x10
4
71.43x10
4

MTTR (h) 1 1
Availability 99.99932% 99.99986%

10.6 Safety Certification
The OptiX OSN 7500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 10-47 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received.
Table 10-47 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received
Item Standard
EMC CISPR22 Class A
CISPR24
EN55022 Class A
EN50024
ETSI EN 300 386 Class A
ETSI ES 201 468
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A
ICES 003 Class A
AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
GB9254 Class A
VCCI Class A
Safety IEC 60950-1
IEC/EN41003
EN 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 No 60950-1
AS/NZS 60950-1
BS EN 60950-1
IS 13252
GB4943
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 192 of 223

Item Standard
Laser safety FDA rules
21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
IEC60825-1
IEC60825-2
EN60825-1
EN60825-2
GB7247
Health ICNIRP Guideline
1999-519-EC
EN 50385
OET Bulletin 65
IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection RoHS

10.7 Environmental Conditions
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a different environment during storage, transportation,
and operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions.
The following international standards are used as the reference for specifying the
environmental conditions:
l ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly
temperature-controlled location
l NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS)
Requirements: Physical Protection
10.7.1 Environment for Storage
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage.
10.7.2 Environment for Transportation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation.
10.7.3 Environment for Operation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.
10.7.1 Environment for Storage
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage.
Climatic Conditions
Table 10-48 lists the climatic conditions for storage.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 193 of 223

Table 10-48 Climatic conditions for storage
Item Range
Altitude 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Air temperature 40 to +70
Rate of change of temperature 1 /min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation 1120 W/s
2

Heat radiation 600 W/s
2

Movement of surrounding air 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirements
Generally, the equipment on the customer site must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment cartons. The
equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water
leakage such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l The cartons must be intact.
l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.
l There should be no water on the ground where the cartons are placed.
l The cartons must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Conditions
l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.
l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-49.
Table 10-49 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during
storage
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Dust (suspension) 5.00 mg/m
3

Dust (sedimentation) 20.0 mg/m
2
h
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 194 of 223

Mechanically Active Substance Content
Sand 300 mg/m
3


l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-50.
Table 10-50 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during
storage
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO
2
0.30 mg/m
3

H
2
S 0.10 mg/m
3

NO
2
0.50 mg/m
3

NH
3
1.00 mg/m
3

Cl
2
0.10 mg/m
3

HCl 0.10 mg/m
3

HF 0.01 mg/m
3

O
3
0.05 mg/m
3


Mechanical Stress
Table 10-51 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 10-51 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage
Item Sub-Item Range
Acceleration
spectral density
- 0.02 m
2
/s
3
-
Frequency 5 Hz to 20
Hz
10 Hz to 50
Hz
50 Hz to
100 Hz
Random
vibration
dB/oct +12 - -12

10.7.2 Environment for Transportation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation.
Climatic Conditions
Table 10-52 lists the climatic conditions for transportation.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 195 of 223

Table 10-52 Climatic conditions for transportation
Item Range
Altitude 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Air temperature 40 to +70
Rate of change of temperature 1 /min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation 1120 W/s
2

Heat radiation 600 W/s
2

Movement of surrounding air 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirements
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l The cartons must be intact.
l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.
l There should be no water in the transportation tool.
Biological Conditions
l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.
l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-53.
Table 10-53 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during
transportation
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Dust (suspension) No requirement
Dust (sedimentation) 3.0 mg/m
2
h
Sand 100 mg/m
3


l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-54.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 196 of 223

Table 10-54 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during
transportation
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO
2
1.00 mg/m
3

H
2
S 0.50 mg/m
3

NO
2
1.00 mg/m
3

NH
3
3.00 mg/m
3

Cl
2
-
HCl 0.50 mg/m
3

HF 0.03 mg/m
3

O
3
0.10 mg/m
3


Mechanical Stress
Table 10-55 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during transportation.
Table 10-55 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation
Item Sub-Item Range
Acceleration spectral
density
1 m
2
/s
3
3 dBA Random
vibration
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Response spectrum I
(sample weight > 50 kg)
100 m/s
2
, 11 ms, 100 times on each
surface
Shock
Response spectrum II
(sample weight 50 kg)
180 m/s
2
, 6 ms, 100 times on each
surface
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 10
1.0
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 15
1.0
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 20
0.8
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 30
0.6
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 40
0.5
Fall-off
Weight (kg) < 50
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 197 of 223

Item Sub-Item Range
Height (m) 0.4
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 100
0.3
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
> 100
0.1
NOTE
The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the
equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

10.7.3 Environment for Operation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.
Climatic Conditions
Table 10-56 and Table 10-57 list the climatic conditions when the OptiX OSN 7500
operates.
Table 10-56 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term
working
conditions
Short-term working
conditions
Long-term
working
conditions
Short-term working
conditions
0 to 45 5 to +55 10% to 90% 5% to 95%
NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4
m in front of the equipment. Short-term working conditions mean that the continuous working
time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and that the accumulated working time every
year does not exceed 15 days.

Table 10-57 Other climatic conditions
Item Range
Altitude 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Rate of change of temperature 30 /h
Solar radiation 700 W/s
2

Heat radiation 600 W/s
2

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 198 of 223

Item Range
Movement of surrounding air 5 m/s

Biological Conditions
l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.
l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-58.
Table 10-58 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during
operation
Mechanically Active
Substance
Content
Dust particle 3 x 10
5
particles/m
3

Dust (suspension) 0.2 mg/m
3

Dust (sedimentation) 1.5 mg/m
2
h
Sand 20 mg/m
3


l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-59.
Table 10-59 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during
operation
Chemically Active
Substance
Content
SO
2
0.30 mg/m
3

H
2
S 0.10 mg/m
3

NH
3
1.00 mg/m
3

Cl
2
0.10 mg/m
3

HCl 0.10 mg/m
3

HF 0.01 mg/m
3

O
3
0.05 mg/m
3

NO
X
0.50 mg/m
3

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 199 of 223

Mechanical Stress
Table 10-60 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during operation.
Table 10-60 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Item Sub-Item Range
Velocity 5 mm/s -
Acceleration - 2 m/s
2

Sinusoidal
vibration
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock response
spectrum II
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s
2
, 11 ms, three times
on each surface
Shock
Static load 0 kPa
NOTE
The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the
equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
Different boards have different power consumption and weight.
Table 10-61 lists the power consumption and weight of each board.
Table 10-61 Power consumption and weight of each board
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weig
ht
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
SDH boards
T2SL64 30 1.1 T2SL64A 40 1.1
N1SL64 22 1.1 N1SLD64 41 1.2
N1SF64 23 1.1 N1SF16 26 1.1
N1SF64A 33 1.1 N1SL16A
and
N2SL16A
20 1.1
N3SL16 22 1.1 N1SLQ16 21 0.9
N2SLQ16 38 1.3 N1SL4A 17 1.0
N1SL16
and
N2SL16
20 1.1 N1SLD4A 17 1.0
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 200 of 223

Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weig
ht
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1SLO16 38 1.0 N1SLQ4A 17 1.0
N1SL4 and
N2SL4
15 1.0 N1SL1A 17 1.0
N1SLD4
and
N2SLD4
15 1.0 N1SLN 12 0.6
N1SLQ4
and
N2SLQ4
16 1.0 N3SLD41 13 0.6
N1SL1 and
N2SL1
14 1.0 N3SLQ41 14 0.6
N1SLQ1
and
N2SLQ1
15 1.0 N1SLQ1A 17 1.0
N2SLO1 26 1.1 N1SLT1 15 1.2
N3SLO1 24 1.2 N3SLT1 25 1.3
N1SLH1 22 1.0 N1SEP1
and
N1SEP
17 1.0
N1SLH1A 21 1.0 N1RPC01 110 4.0
N1RPC02 70 4.2 - - -
PDH boards
N1PD3 19 1.1 N2PQ3 13 0.9
N2PD3 12 0.9 N1PQ1 19 1.0
N1PL3 and
N1PL3A
15 1.0 N2PQ1 13 1.0
N2PL3 and
N2PL3A
12 0.9 N1PQM 22 1.0
N2SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PQMA 21 1.0
N1DX1 15 (before the
tributary
protection
switching
(TPS)); 31 (after
the TPS)
1.0 N1DXA 10 0.8
Interface boards and switching and bridging boards
N1MU04 2 0.4 N1C34S 0 (before the 0.3
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 201 of 223

Board Weig
ht
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
TPS); 2 (after the
TPS)
N1EU08 11 0.4 N1D12B 0 0.3
N1OU08
and
N2OU08
6 0.4 N1D12S 0 (before the
TPS); 9 (after the
TPS)
0.4
N1D34S 0 (before the
TPS); 2 (after
the TPS)
0.4 N1D75S 0 (before the
TPS); 6 (after the
TPS)
0.4
N1TSB8 0 (before the
TPS); 5 (after
the TPS)
0.3 N1DM12 0 (before the
TPS); 8 (after the
TPS)
0.5
N1ETF8 2 0.4 N1ETS8 0 (before the
TPS); 3 (after the
TPS)
0.4
N1EFF8 6 0.4 - - -
Data boards
N1EAS2 70 1.2 N1ADL4 41 0.9
N1EFS4 30 1.0 N1ADQ1 41 1.0
N3EFS4 22 1.1 N1IDL4 41 1.0
N1EMS2 40 (with the
electrical
interface board);
54 (with the
optical interface
board)
0.8 N1EMS4 65 (with the
electrical
interface board);
75 (with the
optical interface
board)
1.1
N2EGS2 43 1.0 N1IDQ1 41 1.0
N3EGS2 25 1.0 N1MST4 26 0.9
N1EGT2 29 0.9 N2EGT2 15 0.9
N1EGS4
and
N3EGS4
70 1.1 N1EFT8
and
N1EFT8A
22 1.0
N4EGS4 43 0.7 N2EFS0
and
N4EFS0
35 1.0
N2EGR2 40 1.1 N1EFS0A 33 (with the
electrical
interface board);
44 (with the
1.1
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 202 of 223

Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weig
ht
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
optical interface
board)
N2EMR0 50 1.2 N5EFS0 26 (with the
electrical
interface board);
32 (with the
optical interface
board)
0.6
Cross-connect boards and system control boards
N2GSCC
and
N3GSCC
20 0.9 T1SXCSA 96 2.2
N4GSCC 19 1.0 T2UXCSA 69 2.1
N5GSCC 10 0.9 T1IXCSA 140 2.4
T1GXCSA 41 1.8 T1EXCSA 53 1.9
Other boards
TN11MR2 0.2 0.9 BA2 20 1.0
TN11MR4 0.2 0.9 N1BPA 20 1.0
N1MR2A 0 1.0 N2BPA 11 1.2
N1MR2C 0 1.0 61COA
and
N1COA
10 3.5
TN11CMR
2
0.2 0.8 62COA 75 8
TN11CMR
4
0.2 0.9 T1AUX 3 0.4
TN11OBU
1
16 1.3 N1FANA 19 1.5
N1LWX 30 1.1 T1PIU 8 1.3
N1IFSD1 27 1.1 N1RPWR 45 1.4

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 203 of 223

11 Compliant Standards
11.1 ITU-T Recommendations
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation Description
G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted
single-mode optical fiber and cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic
parameters of optical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices
and sub-systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices
and sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and
subsystems
G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other
SDH systems with optical amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical
amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency
grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength
grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital
interfaces
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 204 of 223

Recommendation Description
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048,
8448 and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of
transmission systems
G.774 1-5 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
information model for the network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS)
defect detection and clearance criteria
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
equipment functional blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as
node clocks in synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks
(SEC)
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks
which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy
G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks
which are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy
G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks
which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH)
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for
international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the
primary rate
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on
the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection
architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 205 of 223

Recommendation Description
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to
the synchronous digital hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital
hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional
characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and
functions
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification
I.630 ATM protection switching
M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data
terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating
equipment (DCE)
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108
kHz group band circuits
V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current
interchange circuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment
(DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous
V-Series modems
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS

11.2 IEEE Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IEEE standards.
Table 11-2 IEEE standards
Standard Description
IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer
specifications
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 206 of 223

Standard Description
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks Amendment 4: Provider
bridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and
management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer,
medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation,
type 100Base-T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks:
specification for 802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer,
repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s
operation
IEEE 1588 Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and
control systems implemented with technologies

11.3 IETF Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IETF standards.
Table 11-3 IETF standards
Standard Description
RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and
OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 207 of 223

Standard Description
RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding

11.4 ANSI Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ANSI related standards.
Table 11-4 ANSI related standards
Standard Description
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)

11.5 Environment Related Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the environment related standards.
Table 11-5 Environment related standards
Standard Description
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information -
Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake
vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:
Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 1: Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:
Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage
locations
ETS 300 019-1-3 Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS
GR-63-CORE
Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements:
Physical protection
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 208 of 223

11.6 EMC Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the EMC related standards.
Table 11-6 EMC related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and
measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity
test
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and
measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and
measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and
measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and
measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted
disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-29
EN 61000-4-29
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing
and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot
interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power
port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance
characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity
charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters
(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters
(ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of
service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications
equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)

11.7 Safety Compliance Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 209 of 223

Table 11-7 Safety compliance related standards
Standard Description
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 950 Safety of information technology equipment including
electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2
No 1-M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2
No 950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

11.8 Protection Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the protection related standards.
Table 11-8 Protection related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I:
general principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and
measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to
overvoltages and overcurrents
ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a
telecommunication building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication
centres to surge overvoltages

11.9 ASON Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ASON related standards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 210 of 223

Table 11-9 ASON related standards
Standard Description
G.807 Requirements for automatic switched transport networks
(ASTN)
G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched optical network
(ASON)
G.7712 Architecture and specification of data communication network
G.7713 Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on
PNNI
G.7714 Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks
G.7715 ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state
protocols
G.7716 Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and
recovery
G.7717 Connection admission control
G.7718 Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471
(GMPLS)
Signaling functional description

11.10 Microwave Standards
The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the microwave related standards.
Table 11-10 Microwave related standards
Standard Description
ITU-R F.384-7 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high
capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the
upper 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.383-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity
radio-relay systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.385-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless
systems operating in the 7 GHz band
ITU-R F.386-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high
capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the
8 GHz band
ITU-R F.387-9 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems
operating in the 11 GHz band
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 211 of 223

Standard Description
ITU-R F.497-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems
operating in the 13 GHz frequency band
ITU-R F.636-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems
operating in the 15 GHz band
ITU-R F.595-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless
systems operating in the 18 GHz frequency band
ITU-R F.637-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems
operating in the 23 GHz band
ITU-R F.748-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems
operating in the 25, 26 and 28 GHz bands
ITU-R F.749-2 Radio-frequency arrangements for systems of the fixed service
operating in the 38 GHz band
ITU-R F.1191-1
1
Bandwidths and unwanted emissions of digital radio-relay
systems
ITU-R
SM.329-10
Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain
ETSI EN 302
217-1 V1.1.4
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 1: Overview and
system-independent common characteristics
ETSI EN 302
217-2-1 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-1:
System-dependent requirements for digital systems operating in
frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-2-2 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements
forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized
EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE
Directive for digital systems operating in frequency bands where
frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-3 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements
forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 3: Harmonized
EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE
Directive for equipment operating in frequency bands where no
frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-4-1 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-1:
System-dependent requirements for antennas
ETSI EN 302
217-4-2 V1.2.1
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized
EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE
Directive for antennas
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 212 of 223

Standard Description
ETSI EN 301
126-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 1:
Point-to-Point equipment - Definitions, general requirements and
test procedures
ETSI EN 301
126-3-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 3-1:
Point-to-Point antennas; Definitions, general requirements and
test procedures
ETSI EN 301
390 V1.2.1
Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point and Multipoint Systems;
Spurious emissions and receiver immunity limits
atequipment/antenna port of Digital Fixed Radio Systems
iec
60153-2-1974
Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for
ordinary rectangular waveguides
iec
60154-2-1980
Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for
flanges for ordinary rectangular waveguides


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 213 of 223

12 Glossary
This chapter lists the glossary used in this manual.
1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one
working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent
bridge.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N
working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have
one extra traffic signal.
10BASE-T 10Base-T is a transmission medium specified by IEEE 802.3i
that carries information at rates up to 10Mbps in baseband form
using unshielded twisted pair (UTP) conductors with low cost
Level 3 or better UTP wiring up to 100 meters (328 ft.). 10BaseT
uses RJ45 connectors and sometimes 50-pin AMP connectors
to a patch panel.
100BASE-T IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s
CSMA/CD local area network.
100Base-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s
CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5
unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP)
wire.
3R Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.

A
ADM A communications device that multiplexes (combines) several
signals for transmission over a single medium. A demultiplexor
completes the process by separating multiplexed signals from a
transmission line.Frequently a multiplexor and demultiplexor are
combined into a single device capable of processing both
outgoing and incoming signals.
Alarm A means of alerting the operator that a specified abnormal
condition exists.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 214 of 223

ALS A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output
power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid
exposure to hazardous levels.
ATM Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a high-performance,
cell-oriented switching and multiplexing technology that utilizes
fixed-length packets to carry different types of traffic. ATM is a
technology that will enable carriers to capitalize on a number of
revenue opportunities through multiple ATM classes of services;
high-speed local-area network (LAN) interconnection; voice,
video, and future multimedia applications in business markets in
the short term; and in community and residential markets in the
longer term..

B
Bandwidth The range of frequencies a circuit will respond to or pass
through. It may also be the difference between the highest and
lowest frequencies of a signal.

C
Concatenation The process of summing the bandwidth of a number of smaller
containers into a larger bandwidth container. Two versions exist:
contiguous concatenation and virtual concatenation.
Control plane The control plane performs the call control and connection
control functions. Through signalling, the control plane sets up
and releases connections, and may restore a connection in case
of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in
support of call and connection control, such as routing
information dissemination.
CoS Characteristics of a service such as described by service
identity, virtual network, link capability requirements, QoS and
traffic threshold parameters.

D
DNI DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point,
between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario.

E
Encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols in which a layer adds
header information to the protocol data unit (PDU) from the layer
above. As an example, in Internet terminology, a packet would
contain a header from the physical layer, followed by a header
from the network layer (IP), followed by a header from the
transport layer (TCP), followed by the application protocol data.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 215 of 223

EPL A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH
bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared
between different customers.
Ethernet The IEEE 802.3 standard for contention networks. Ethernet
uses a bus or star topology and relies on the form of access
known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Detection (CSMA/CD) to regulate communication line traffic.
Network nodes are linked by coaxial cable, by fiber-optic cable,
or by twisted-pair wiring. Data is transmitted in variable-length
frames containing delivery and control information and up to
1,500 bytes of data. The Ethernet standard provides for
baseband transmission at 10 megabits (10 million bits) per
second and is available in various forms, including those known
as Thin Ethernet, Thick Ethernet, 10Base2, 10Base5, 10BaseF,
and 10BaseT. The IEEE standard dubbed 802.3z, or Gigabit
Ethernet, operates at 10 times 100 Mbps speed.
ETSI ETSI standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body
responsible for GSM.
EVPL A service that is both a line service and a virtual private service.
Extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that
capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra
traffic is not protected.

F
Fairness
algorithm
To ensure that all the stations can share the bandwidth fairly in
the event of congestion or overload, RPR presents a special fair
algorithm for fair bandwidth sharing and allocation.
FEC forward error correction (FEC) is a system of error control for
data transmission, whereby the sender adds redundant data to
its messages, which allows the receiver to detect and correct
errors (within some bound) without the need to ask the sender
for additional data. The advantage of forward error correction is
that retransmission of data can often be avoided, at the cost of
higher bandwidth requirements on average, and is therefore
applied in situations where retransmissions are relatively costly
or impossible.
Fiber jumper Fiber that is used for connections between the subrack and the
ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a
subrack.
Forced switch An action when the network operator forces the network to use
the protection resources instead of the working resources, or
vice-versa, regardless of the state of the resources.
Frame In data transmission, the sequence of contiguous bits delimited
by, and including, beginning and ending flag sequences.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 216 of 223

I
IMA Short for inverse multiplexing over ATM. IMA is a physical layer
technology in which a high-speed stream of ATM cells is broken
up and transmitted across multiple T1/E1 links, then is
reconstructed back into the original ATM cell order at the
destination. IMA is first standardized (v1.0) by the ATM Forum
in1997, and updated (v1.1) in 1999.
IMA group IMA group refers to physical links grouped to form a
higher-bandwidth logical link, whose rate is approximately the
sum of the individual link rates.
Intelligent
Network
Service
An Intelligent Network service is a sophisticated
telecommunication service. Its creation and its operation are
facilitated by telecommunication network architecture, based on
Intelligent Network (IN) concept.

J
Jitter The variation in the time taken for packets to be delivered to an
endpoint or network entity.

L
Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to
its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for
errors.

M
Manual
Switching
When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a
higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the
working path to the protection path, to test whether the network
still has the protection capability.
Map A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into Virtual
Containers at the boundary of an SDH network.
MSP The function performed to provide capability for switching a
signal between and including two MST functions, from a
"working" to a "protection" channel.
Multiplexer An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels
onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the
relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being
fixed.

O
ODU The ODU is the outdoor part of the OptiX RTN 600 system. It
performs frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 217 of 223

Optical
Amplifier
Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified
by means of the stimulated emission taking place in an suitable
active medium.
Orderwire Orderwire is able to provide voice communication for operators
or maintenance engineers at different workstation.

P
Paired slots A pair of slots whose overhead can be processed by the bus on
the backplane. For the two boards in the paired slots, the
inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the
cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the
cross-connect board.

R
Ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node
connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway
for signals.
RPR Resilient packet ring (RPR) technology is optimized for robust
and efficient packet networking over a fiber ring topology. It has
resilient mechanisms such as dynamic bandwidth allocation
through fairness algorithm, space multiplexing, and wrap
protection. RPR nodes are connected in a ring topology by two
fibers, each transmitting in the opposite direction. RPR networks
delivers data, voice, and video services through packets.

S
SNCP A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection
subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection
fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
SLA The contract between a service provider and the customer that
specifies the level of service that will be provided.

T
TCM A method used to monitor bit errors. If a VC-4 passes through
several networks, the bit errors of each section can be
monitored through TCM.
TCP/IP A suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on
the Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones
being TCP and IP.
Timeslot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which
two devices are able to interconnect.
TPS In the optical transmission system, tributary protection switching
(TPS) refers to the protection switching of tributary signals.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 218 of 223

Transport plane The transport plane provides bidirectional or unidirectional
transfer of user information, from one location to another. It can
also provide transfer of some control and network management
information. The transport plane is layered; it is equivalent to the
transport network defined in ITU-T Rec. G.805.

V
VC Virtual concatenation is the primary enhancement to voice
optimized SONET, in order to support the transport of variable
bit data streams.

W
WTR A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault
recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the
normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal
from.


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 219 of 223

13 Acronyms and Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.
A
ABR Available Bit Rate
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
B
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply System
BPA Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit
C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CC Continuity Check
CF Compact Flash
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CR-LDP Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
D
DCC Data Communication Channels
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DDN Digital Data Network
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 220 of 223

DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FC Fiber Channel
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber Connection
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMPLS General Multiprotocol Label Switching
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High level Data Link Control
I
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 221 of 223

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
L
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN Local Area Network; Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB Loopback
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LPT Link State Path Through
LSP Label Switch Path
M
MAC Media Access Control
MADM Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer
MCF Message Communication Function
MLM Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
N
NEBS Network Equipment-Building System
nrt-VBR Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate
NS Network Side
NSF Non-interrupted Service Forwarding
O
OADM Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OAM&P Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision
ODU Outdoor Unit
OSP OptiX Software Platform
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 222 of 223

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
Q
QoS Quality of Service
R
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RSTP Rapid Span Tree Protocol
rt-VBR Real Time Variable Bite rate
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering
Extensions
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form Pluggable
SLA Service Level Agreement
SLM Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
T
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TPS Tributary Protection Switching
U
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UPM Uninterrupted Power Modules
V
VC Virtual Channel
VCC Virtual Channel Connection
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VP Virtual Path
VPC Virtual Path Connection
VPN Virtual Private Network
W
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com



OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description

Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 223 of 223

WTR Wait-to-Restore


PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

You might also like